You are on page 1of 218

PCS-915A

Busbar Protection
Instruction Manual

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface

Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Health and Safety


The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:

Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;

Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;

Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;

Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings


The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
i

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

Preface

DANGER!
It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
WARNING!
It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION!
It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!

Exposed terminals

Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous

ii

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

Preface

Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION!

Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.

Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.

External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Copyright
Version: R1.02

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.


69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

P/N: EN_YJBH5301.0086.0003

Tel: +86-25-87178185,

Fax: +86-25-87178208

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com


Copyright NR 2013. All rights reserved

Email: NR_TechSupport@nari-relays.com

We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

iii

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

Preface

Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relays use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.

2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.

3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.

4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.

5 Measurement and Recording


Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.

6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module.

7 Settings
List settings including protection settings, system settings, communication settings, label settings,
VEBI settings and etc., and some notes about the setting application.

8 Human Machine Interface


Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.

9 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.

10 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
iv

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

Preface

earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.

11 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.

12 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.

13 Decommissioning and Disposal


A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.

14 Manual Version History


List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

Preface

vi

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

1 Introduction

1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1 Introduction..................................................................................... 1-a
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Feature ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Abbreviation .................................................................................................... 1-3

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

1-a
Date: 2012-08-31

1 Introduction

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

1-b
Date: 2012-08-31

1 Introduction

1.1 Application
PCS-915A is a numerical busbar differential protection intended to be used for protecting and
monitoring of double busbars with bus coupler arrangement, single busbar arrangement and
single busbar with single bus section arrangement of various voltage levels. It is capable to protect
up to 25 bays including bus coupler and bus section (bay 01 is connected with bus coupler (BC),
the rest bays are taken as feeder 01~24).
PCS-915A utilizes NRs innovative hardware platform supporting both conventional CT/VT and
electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT). It is compliant to several communication
protocols, such as IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocol.

PCS-915
87B

50BF

FR

VT1

BB1

*
VT2

BC

BB2

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application-Double busbars with BC arrangement

Note!

The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and
sampled values related with each feeder and busbar will change with the corresponding
description settings. Please refer to Section 7.8 for details.
For example, if the description setting of feeder 01 i.e. [NameDef_Bay02] is set as Fdr01,
the three-phase initiating contact of BFP for feeder 01 is [BI_BFI_Fdr01]. If
[NameDef_Bay02] is set as 0001, the three-phase initiating contact of BFP for feeder 01
is [BI_BFI_0001].
In this instruction manual, only take the default settings in Table 7.8-1 as an example to
introduce.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

1-1
Date: 2012-08-31

1 Introduction

1.2 Function
PCS-915 provides the following functions
1.

Protection function

Busbar differential protection (87B)

Steady-state percentage differential protection

DPFC percentage differential protection

Bus coupler protection

SOTF protection (50)

End zone fault protection (50DZ)

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Overcurrent protection (50/51)

Pole discrepancy protection (62PD)

Feeder breaker failure protection (50BF)


Note!
DPFC is the abbreviation of Deviation of Power Frequency Component. When a fault
occurs in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the pre-fault power
frequency components, the power frequency variables during the fault and the transient
variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.

2.

Auxiliary protection

Dynamic busbar replica

CT circuit failure supervision

VT circuit failure supervision

Disconnector position alarm

1.3 Feature
1.

Protection and Control

Parallel calculation of double DSP system

Independent fault detector element

Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip


PCS-915A Busbar Protection

1-2
Date: 2012-08-31

1 Introduction

Less than 20ms typical trip time for busbar differential protection

High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection

Matching to different CT ratios and settable CT adjustment coefficient

A well proven adaptive weighted anti-saturation algorithm

Friendly human machine interface

Comprehensive event recorder

Multi-language option - English, Chinese and Russian

2.

Time synchronization

Receiving PPS (pulse per second) and PPM (pulse per minute) via external contact

Receiving PPS, PPM and IRIG-B signal via RS-485

Receiving time synchronization message from substation automation system

3.

Event recorder and disturbance recorder

1024 latest fault reports

1024 latest self-supervision reports

1024 latest status change of binary input reports

32 latest fault waveforms (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible with the
international COMTRADE file)

4.

Communication

2 rear RS-485 communication ports supporting with IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, ModBus
protocol or DNP3.0 protocol

4 Ethernet ports at most (depend on the chosen CPU type) supporting with IEC 60870-5-103
protocol or IEC 61850-8-1 protocol

1 rear RS-485 communication port for time synchronization

1 RS-232 communication rear ports for printer

A front multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC

1.4 Abbreviation
Symbol

Description

FD

Fault detector

BBx

Busbar No.x, x is the number of each busbar

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

1-3
Date: 2012-08-31

1 Introduction
Symbol

Description

feeder xx

Feeder No.xx, xx is the number of each feeder

VCE

Voltage controlled element

BBP

Busbar differential protection

BFP

Breaker failure protection

BFI

Breaker failure initiation

EFP

End zone fault protection

PD

Pole disagreement

SAS

Substation automatic system

RTU

Remote terminal unit

CT

Current transformer

VT

Voltage transformer

DPFC

Deviation of power frequency component

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

1-4
Date: 2012-08-31

2 Technical Data

2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2 Technical Data................................................................................. 2-a
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Mechanical Specifications ............................................................................. 2-2


2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-2
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2 Ethernet Port........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-4

2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-4


2.5.1 Environmental Tests ............................................................................................................ 2-4
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5

2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6


2.7 Measurement Scope and Accuracy ............................................................... 2-6
2.8 Management Function .................................................................................... 2-6
2.8.1 Clock Performance .............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.8.2 Fault and Disturbance Recording ........................................................................................ 2-6

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-a
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data

2.8.3 Binary Input Signal............................................................................................................... 2-6

2.9 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-7


2.9.1 Busbar Differential Protection .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.9.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection................................................................................................. 2-7
2.9.3 Bus coupler/bus section Overcurrent Protection ................................................................. 2-7
2.9.4 Bus coupler/bus section Pole Disagreement Protection ..................................................... 2-7
2.9.5 Bus coupler/bus section Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................... 2-7
2.9.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection ...................................................................................... 2-7

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-b
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data

2.1 Electrical Specifications


2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current
Phase rotation

ABC

Nominal frequency (fn)

505Hz, 605Hz

Rated Current (In)

1A

Linear to

0.05In~40In

5A

Thermal withstand
-continuously

4In

-for 10s

30In

-for 1s

100In

-for half a cycle

250In

Burden

< 0.15VA/phase @In

Accuracy

0.5%In

< 0.25VA/phase @In

2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage


Phase rotation

ABC

Nominal frequency (fn)

505Hz, 605Hz

Rated Voltage (Un)

100V~130V

Linear to

1V~170V

Thermal withstand
-continuously

200V

-10s

260V

-1s

300V

Burden at rated

< 0.20VA/phase @Un

Accuracy

0.5%Un

2.1.3 Power Supply


Standard

IEC 60255-11:2008

Rated Voltage

110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc

Operating Range

80%~120% of rated voltage

Permissible AC ripple voltage

15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage

Burden
Quiescent condition

<40W

Operating condition

<60W

2.1.4 Binary Input


Rated Voltage

24V

48V

110V

125V

220V

250V

Rated current drain

1.2mA

2.4mA

1.1mA

1.25mA

2.2mA

2.5mA

Pickup voltage

55%~70% of rated voltage

Dropoff voltage

<55% of rated voltage

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-1
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data
Maximum permissible voltage
Withstand voltage
-continously
Response time for logic input

120% of rated voltage


2000Vac, 2800Vdc
<1ms

2.1.5 Binary Output


Contact Type

Trip output

Signal output

Output mode

Potential free contact


5A@380Vac

8A@380Vac

5A@250Vdc

8A@250Vdc

Pickup time

<8ms (typical 3ms)

<10ms

Dropoff time

<5ms

<8ms

0.65A@48Vdc

1.20A@48Vdc

0.30A@110Vdc

0.50A@110Vdc

0.15A@220Vdc

0.25A@220Vdc

Electrical Life

10000 times

10000 times

Burden

300mW

240mW

Making capacity

2000VA

3040VA

Continuous carry

Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)

Maximal system voltage


Test voltage across open contact
Short duration current

380Vac
250Vdc
1000V RMS for 1min

1200V RMS for 1min

6A@3s

10A@3S

15A@0.5s

20A@0.5S

2.2 Mechanical Specifications


Mounting Way

Flush mounted

Housing color

Silver grey

Weight per device

Approx. 30kg

Housing material

Aluminum

Location of terminal

Rear panel of the device

Device structure

Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate

Protection class
Standard

IEC 60225-1:2009

Front side

IP40, up to IP51 (Flush mounted)

Other sides

IP30

Rear side, connection terminals

IP20

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range


Standard

IEC 60225-1:2009

Operating temperature

-40C to +70C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-2
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data
C)
Transport and storage temperature
range

-40C to +70C

Permissible humidity

5%-95%, without condensation

Pollution degree

Altitude

<3000m

2.4 Communication Port


2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate

4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103:1997

Maximal capacity

32

Transmission distance

<500m

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

Twisted pair

Screened twisted pair cable

2.4.2 Ethernet Port


Connector type

RJ-45

Transmission rate

100Mbits/s

Transmission standard

100Base-TX

Transmission distance

<100m

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103:1997 or IEC 61850

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port


2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

ST, SC

Fibre type

Multi mode

Transmission distance

<2km

Wave length

1310nm

Transmission power

Min. -20.0dBm

Minimum receiving power

Min. -30.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.2 For Process Level


Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

LC

Fibre type

Multi mode

Transmission distance

<2km

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-3
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data
Wave length

1310nm

Transmission power

Min. -20.0dBm

Minimum receiving power

Min. -30.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port


Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

ST

Fibre type

Multi mode

Wave length

820nm

Minimum receiving power

Min. -25.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.4 Print Port


Type

RS-232

Baud Rate

4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Printer type

EPSON 300K printer

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port


Type

RS-485

Transmission distance

<500m

Maximal capacity

32

Timing standard

PPS, IRIG-B

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.5 Type Tests


2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test

IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test

IEC60068-2-2:2007

Damp heat test, cyclic

IEC60068-2-30:2005

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests


Vibration

IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump

IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests


Standard

IEC 60255-27:2005

Dielectric tests

Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min

Standard

IEC 60255-5:2000

Impulse voltage tests

Test voltage 5kV

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-4
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data

Overvoltage category
Insulation

resistance

measurements

Isolation resistance >100M@500VDC

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility


IEC 60255-22-1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test

Common mode: class III 2.5kV


Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV

Electrostatic discharge test

For contact discharge: 8kV


For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz

Radio frequency interference tests

Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-22-4:2008

Fast transient disturbance tests

Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns


Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-22-5:2008

Surge immunity test

Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us


Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV

Conducted

RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
kHz~80MHz

Power Frequency Magnetic Field

IEC 61000-4-8:2001

Immunity

class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s

Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity

IEC 61000-4-9:2001
class V, 6.4/16s, 1000A/m for 3s

Damped oscillatory magnetic field

IEC 61000-4-10:2001

immunity

class V, 100kHz & 1MHz100A/m

Auxiliary power supply performance

IEC60255-11: 2008

- Voltage dips

Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset

-Voltage short interruptions

100ms for interruption without rebooting

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-5
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data

2.6 Certifications

ISO9001:2008

ISO14001:2004

OHSAS18001:2007

ISO10012:2003

CMMI L4

EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999

Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001

2.7 Measurement Scope and Accuracy


Item

Range

Accuracy

Phase range

0~ 360

0.5% or 1

Frequency

fn3Hz

0.01Hz

Currents from protection measurement current transformers


Current

0.05 ~ 40.00In

2.5% of rating or 0.02In

Voltage

0.05 ~ 1.20Un

1.0% of rating or 0.01Un

2.8 Management Function


2.8.1 Clock Performance
Real time clock accuracy

3s/day

Accuracy of GPS synchronization

1ms

External time synchronization

IRIG-B (200-98), PPS, IEEE1588 or SNTP protocol

2.8.2 Fault and Disturbance Recording


Maximum duration

6000 sampled points (24 sampled points per cycle)

Recording position

2~50 cycles before pickup of trigger element

2.8.3 Binary Input Signal


Resolution of binary input signal

1ms

Binary input mode

Potential-free contact

Resolution of SOE

1ms

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-6
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data

2.9 Protective Functions


Note!
The meanings of symbols mentioned in the following sections are given here.
In -- rated secondary current of reference CT
U2n -- rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT

2.9.1 Busbar Differential Protection


current setting range

0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting

2.5%xSetting or 0.02In, whichever is greater

Accuracy of voltage setting

2.5% or 0.01U2n whichever is greater

2.9.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection


Current setting range

0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting

2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

2.9.3 Bus coupler/bus section Overcurrent Protection


Current setting range

0.05In~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting

2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time setting range

0.000~10.000s

Tolerance of time setting

1%xSetting + 40ms

2.9.4 Bus coupler/bus section Pole Disagreement Protection


Residual current setting range

0~20.00In

Negative-sequence current setting range

0~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting

2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time setting range

0.000~10.000s

Tolerance of time setting

1%xSetting + 40ms

2.9.5 Bus coupler/bus section Breaker Failure Protection


Current setting range

0~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting

2.5%xSetting or 0.02In, whichever is greater

Time setting range

0.010~10.000s

Tolerance of time setting

1%xSetting + 40ms

2.9.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection


Phase current setting range

0~20.00In

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-7
Date: 2013-06-03

2 Technical Data
Residual current setting range

0~20.00In

Negative-sequence current setting range

0~20.00In

Tolerance of current setting

2.5%xSetting or 0.02In, whichever is greater

Time setting range

0.000~10.000s

Tolerance of time setting

1%xSetting + 40ms

Undervoltage setting range

01.732U2n

Residual voltage setting range

0U2n

Negative sequence voltage setting range

0U2n

Accuracy of voltage setting

2.5% or 0.01Un whichever is greater

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

2-8
Date: 2013-06-03

3 Operation Theory

3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3 Operation Theory ............................................................................ 3-a
3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Busbar Differential Protection ....................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Fault detector (FD) element................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Percentage differential element ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.3 Voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection (VCE_BBP) ........................... 3-6
3.2.4 Faulty busbar zone discrimination ....................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.5 Backup busbar differential elements ................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.6 Detection of CT saturation ................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.7 External Block Signal ........................................................................................................... 3-9
3.2.8 Logic scheme....................................................................................................................... 3-9

3.3 Bus Coupler/Section (BC/BS) Protection..................................................... 3-11


3.3.1 BC/BS switch-onto-fault (SOTF) protection .......................................................................3-11
3.3.2 BC/BS overcurrent protection ............................................................................................ 3-12
3.3.3 BC/BS breaker failure protection (BFP) ............................................................................ 3-13
3.3.4 BC/BS end zone fault protection ....................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.5 BC/BS pole discrepancy protection (PD) .......................................................................... 3-15

3.4 Feeder breaker Failure Protection (BFP) .................................................... 3-16


3.4.1 Initiation contact ................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.4.2 Current criterion ................................................................................................................. 3-17
3.4.3 Voltage control element of breaker failure protection(VCE) .............................................. 3-17
3.4.4 Logic scheme..................................................................................................................... 3-18

3.5 Identification of disconnector position ....................................................... 3-19


3.6 VT Circuit Supervision.................................................................................. 3-20
3.7 CT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................. 3-21

3-a

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

3.7.1 CT circuit failure ................................................................................................................. 3-21


3.7.2 CT circuit abnormality ........................................................................................................ 3-21

3.8 BC breaker substitution ............................................................................... 3-21

List of Figures
Figure 3.1-1 Double-busbar arrangement................................................................................. 3-2
Figure 3.2-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one bus section arrangement ......... 3-2
Figure 3.2-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential
element .................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Figure 3.2-3 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault ............................................... 3-9
Figure 3.2-4 Logic scheme of busbar differential protection ............................................... 3-10
Figure 3.3-1 Logic scheme of SOTF protection ..................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3.3-2 Logic scheme of overcurrent protection........................................................... 3-13
Figure 3.3-3 The logic scheme of BFP .................................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3.3-4 The logic scheme of end zone fault protection ................................................ 3-15
Figure 3.3-5 The logic scheme of pole discrepancy protection ........................................... 3-16
Figure 3.4-1 The logic scheme of BFP (for the bay that main transformer is not connected)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Figure 3.4-2 The logic scheme of BFP (for the bay that main transformer is connected) 3-19
Figure 3.8-1 BC breaker substituting through BB2 ............................................................... 3-22
Figure 3.8-2 BC breaker substituting through BB1 ............................................................... 3-23

3-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

3.1 Overview
PCS-915 provides busbar differential protection (BBP), bus coupler/section protection (includes
overcurrent protection, switch-onto-fault protection, pole disagreement protection, end zone fault
protection and breaker failure protection), feeder breaker failure protection, CT circuit supervision
and VT circuit supervision.
The device can support several busbar arrangements, such as double-busbar arrangement,
single-busbar arrangement and single busbar with single bus section arrangement. The switch
method of each busbar arrangement is listed as below:
System settings

En_SingleBB

En_SingleBB_with_SingleBS

Double-busbar

Single-busbar

Single busbar with single bus section

Busbar arrangement

Please refer to Section 7.1 about detailed description of each system setting. For single busbar
with bus section arrangement, the system setting [Cfg_DS_BBx] (x=1, 2) is used to indicate which
busbar zone the feeder is connected to.
The device has 2 plug-in modules (protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module) to
perform calculation. The protection DSP module is responsible for calculation of protection
elements, and fault detector DSP module is responsible for calculation of fault detectors. Any fault
detector of fault detector DSP module picks up to provide positive supply of output relays. The
relays will trip only if the fault detector and the corresponding protection element operate
simultaneously. On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and
logic discrimination can be processed within one sampling period. The event recording and
protection logic calculation are completed simultaneously.
The following figure shows double busbars arrangement and application mode.

3-1

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

Panel A
PCS-915

VT1

BB1

*
VT2
BC

BB2

Figure 3.1-1 Double-busbar arrangement

3.2 Busbar Differential Protection


In order to be easy to explain the protection function and scheme, the first busbar is defined as
busbar No.1 (BB1) and the second busbar is defined as busbar No.2 (BB2). In the case of project
application, the number of each busbar can be set based on on-site case. The polarity marking of
feeder CT should be on the busbar side and the polarity of BC CT should be on the BB1 side.
Please refer to the sketch diagram of primary system Figure 3.2-1.

Discriminative
zone No.1

Discriminative
zone No.2

Check zone

BB1

*
BC

BB2

Figure 3.2-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one bus section arrangement
3-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

Note!
The protective device only identifies the physical position of busbar, ignoring the number of
busbar, takes the busbar arrangement in Figure 3.2-1 as an example, the protective device
will refer the busbar of which the polarity of BC CT is towards as BB1.
The primary protection of PCS-915 is phase-segregated percentage restraint differential
protection. The differential circuits include check zone differential circuit and discriminating zone
differential circuits of each busbar zone. The check zone differential element is used to distinguish
between internal and external fault of the overall busbar system, it measures the current from all
the circuits connected to the busbar system except BC and BS. The discriminating zone
differential elements are used to select faulty zone by measuring the current of all the circuits
connected to individual zones of the busbar system separated by BC and BS.
Discriminating zone No.1 is defined as discriminating differential element of BB1. Discriminating
zone No.2 is defined as discriminating differential element of BB2.
3.2.1 Fault detector (FD) element
PCS-915 provides three independent FD elements for busbar differential protection, which are
DPFC voltage FD element, DPFC current FD element and differential current FD element. If any of
these three elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from busbar differential protection. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.
1.

DPFC voltage FD element

When DPFC voltage of any phase of any busbar is larger than the threshold, DPFC voltage FD
element picks up, the operating criterion is:
u>UFloat+0.05Un

Equation 3.2-1

Where:
u: Instantaneous value of phase-to-phase DPFC voltage
UFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually voltage changing
0.05Un: Fixed threshold value, Un is the rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
If voltage is not sampled or VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will quit
automatically.
2.

DPFC current FD element

If DPFC check zone restraint current is larger than the threshold, DPFC current fault detector
element will operate, the operating criterion is:
si>SIFloat+0.5In

Equation 3.2-2

3-3

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

Where:
si: Instantaneous value of DPFC check zone restraint current of any phase (scalar sum of current
change of all circuits/bays for check zone)
SIFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually current changing
0.5In: Fixed threshold value, In is the rated secondary current of reference CT.
3.

Differential current FD element

When any phase of the check zone differential current is larger than the setting, this element will
operate. The operating criterion is:

ID> [I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP]

Equation 3.2-3

Where:
ID: Differential phase current of check zone
[I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
3.2.2 Percentage differential element
The percentage restraint differential element includes steady-state percentage restraint differential
element and DPFC percentage restraint differential element.

Steady-state percentage restraint differential element


m

The differential current: ID =

I
j1

The restraint current: IR =

I
j1

The operating criterion is:

I D [ I _ Pkp _ Pcnt _ BBP]

I D KI R

Equation 3.2-4

Where:
K: Restraint coefficient of steady-state differential element
Ij: The current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
[I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
The operation characteristic is shown as below.

3-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

ID

ID=IR

Operation region

ID=kIR
[I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP]

IR

Figure 3.2-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential element

To enhance the sensitivity of steady-state check zone differential element for a fault occurred in
the weak source bus zone when the BC breaker is open, dual restraint coefficients [0.5, 0.3] and
[0.6, 0.5] are adopted for steady-state check zone and discriminating zones respectively.
When one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar steady-state percentage restraint
differential protection will operate.
1.

Steady-state check zone differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.5) operates and
steady-state discriminating zone differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.5)
operates.

2.

Steady-state check zone differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3) operates and
steady-state discriminating zone differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.6)
operates.

DPFC percentage differential element

The DPFC percentage restraint differential element is adopted to enhance the performance of
busbar protection against high impedance fault and the influence of heavy loading condition. The
busbar DPFC differential protection is formed by DPFC percentage restraint differential element
and steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient 0.2.
m

The DPFC differential current: ID =

I
j1

The DPFC restraint current: IR =

I
j1

3-5

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

The operating criterion is:

ID IDFloat I DP ickup

I D 0.2I R

ID K / IR

Equation 3.2-5

Where:
K': DPFC restraint coefficient
Ij: DPFC current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
IDFloat: Float threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current
IDPickup: Fixed threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current, which derives from the
setting of [I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP]
Similar to steady-state percentage restraint differential element, dual restraint coefficients are also
introduced to DPFC differential element. The restraint coefficients are fixed at [0.65, 0.3] and [0.65,
0.5] for DPFC check zone and discriminating zones respectively.
When the steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient of 0.2 operates, if one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar DPFC
percentage restraint differential protection will operate.
1.

DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.65)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with low
restraint coefficient (0.5) operates.

2.

DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with high
restraint coefficient (0.65) operates.

3.2.3 Voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection (VCE_BBP)


Voltage controlled element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The operating criteria are:
UP [V_UV_VCE_BBP]

Equation 3.2-6

3U0 [V_ROV_VCE_BBP]

Equation 3.2-7

U2 [V_NegOV_VCE_BBP]

Equation 3.2-8

Where:
UP: Secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage

3-6

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

3U0: Residual voltage (calculated internally)


U2: Negative sequence voltage
[V_UV_VCE_BBP]: Phase-to-ground voltage setting for blocking BBP
[V_ROV_VCE_BBP]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BBP
[V_NegOV_VCE_BBP]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BBP
Busbar differential protection is always blocked by voltage control element. Busbar differential
protection can not operate to trip faulty busbar zone unless the voltage of corresponding busbar
zone met any of above criterions.
When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, the criteria of voltage control element will be changed.
UPP [V_UV_VCE_BBP]

Equation 3.2-9

U2[V_NegOV_VCE_BBP]

Equation 3.2-10

Where:
UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage
U2: Negative sequence voltage
[V_UV_VCE_BBP]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BBP
[V_NegOV_VCE_BBP]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP
3.2.4 Faulty busbar zone discrimination
The check zone differential element calculates the current from all circuits connected to the entire
busbar system except BC and BS to distinguish between internal and external fault. The
discriminating zone differential elements calculate the current of all the circuits connected to
individual zones via replica image of disconnector position to determine faulty zone.
When the operation criterion of check zone differential element (steady-state check zone
differential element is supervised by CT saturation detector 2 and DPFC check zone differential
element is supervised by CT saturation detector 1, to be described in the following section) and
any discriminating zone differential element is fulfilled, VCE_BBP of any busbar operates, the
busbar differential protection will operate to trip all bays connected to the faulty busbar.
The protection has a feature of inter-connection operation mode, the feature will be effective
automatically under the following conditions.
1. The binary input [EBI_IntLink_Mode] is energized or the virtual enable binary input
[VEBI_IntLink_Mode] is set as 1, it should be done when two bus zones are coupled together
and unable to detach for a particular system operation condition.
2. On-load transfer condition (when two busbar disconnectors of one feeder are closed at the
3-7

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

same time).
Under the inter-connection operation mode, the discriminating zone differential elements measure
the current signals are the same as that of check zone differential element. The coupled busbars
will be tripped simultaneously when there is a fault.
3.2.5 Backup busbar differential elements
If only the check zone percentage restraint differential element (supervised by CT saturation
detector 2) operates, two stages of backup protection with fixed time delay are applied to trip the
corresponding circuit breakers. Stage 1 of backup protection will trip BC/BS (when VCE of any
busbar operates) and the feeders of which CT correction coefficient is not zero and does not have
disconnector position after 240ms. Stage 2 of backup protection will trip the feeders connected to
the busbar of which voltage clocking has been released and the feeders with current larger than
2*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) after 480ms.
3.2.6 Detection of CT saturation
Two detectors are used to prevent unwanted tripping caused by severe CT saturation during
external close up fault. If the differential current is determined to be caused by CT saturation, the
device will block busbar differential protection to prevent mal-operation.

CT saturation detector 1

When DPFC voltage or current FD element operates, the adaptive weighted algorithm for CT
saturation detector will be activated. In case of busbar fault occurs, DPFC differential element will
operate almost at the same time with DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC current FD element,
whereas for external fault, DPFC differential element will not operate before CT saturation at the
fault incipient stage, it will only operate after DPFC voltage element and DPFC current element in
case CT is saturated. Adaptive weighted algorithm for CT saturation detector is derived from the
difference of operating time among these DPFC elements. In coordination with DPFC differential
element, it has performed excellently to distinguish between internal and external fault with CT
saturation.

CT saturation detector 2

Harmonic restraint element is used in CT saturation detector 2 by analyzing the waveforms of


differential current harmonics. The detector enables the busbar differential element to remain
stable for an external fault with CT saturation while to maintain fast tripping for the external fault
evolved to internal fault on the same phase.
The blocking signal of CT saturation detector 2 will only last for 500ms. After that the busbar
differential element is released to operate for complicated fault conditions and minimized affected
area. In practical cases, CT transient saturation will not be more than 500ms.

3-8

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

Figure 3.2-3 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault

Above figure shows the current waveforms recorded in dynamic simulation with heavy CT
saturation during external phase-to-phase fault. Protection stability is well achieved in this extreme
case.
3.2.7 External Block Signal
PCS-915 provides a binary input [BI_Blk_BBP] to block BBP through external binary signal. If the
logic setting [En_BI_Blk_BBP] is set as 1, BBP will be blocked if the binary input [BI_Blk_BBP] is
energized. However, if the binary input [BI_Blk_BBP] is energized for longer than 1 second,
PCS-915 will issue an alarm [Alm_Blk_BBP] and the blocking for BBP is released.
3.2.8 Logic scheme
Figure 3.2-4 only takes BB1 as an example, the logic scheme of BB2 is similar to it.

3-9

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory
[En_BI_Blk_BBP]
&

1s

[BI_Blk_BBP]
1
CT circuit failure
DPFC DIF
CT saturation
detector 1

DPFC DIF 1
DPFC current FD element

&

&

Op_TrpBB1_DPFC_BBP

&

Op_TrpBB1_Pcnt_BBP

&

Op_TrpBC_BBP

DPFC voltage FD element


SP DIF (K=0.2)
&
SP DIF 1 (K=0.2)
HM REL 1
1
500ms

&

SP DIF 1

&

HM REL
1
500ms

1
&

SP DIF
[En_BBP]
[VEBI_BBP]

&

[EBI_BBP]
VCE_BBP 1
VCE_BBP x

SP DIF x
&
VCE_BBP x & BBx is in service

240ms

[Op_Dly1_Pcnt_BBP]

480ms

[Op_Dly2_Pcnt_BBP]

Figure 3.2-4 Logic scheme of busbar differential protection

Please refer to Chapter Settings about the description of each setting.


Where:
DPFC current FD element: DPFC current fault detector element, please refer to Section 3.2.1.
DPFC voltage FD element: DPFC voltage fault detector element, please refer to Section 3.2.1.
DPFC DIF: DPFC percentage differential element for check zone
DPFC DIF1: DPFC percentage differential element for bus zone No.1
SP DIF: Steady-state percentage differential element for check zone
SP DIF1: Steady-state percentage differential element for bus zone No.1
SP DIF2: Steady-state percentage differential element for bus zone No.2
3-10

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

HM REL: Harmonic release element for check zone


HM REL1: Harmonic release element for bus zone No.1
VCE_BBP 1: Voltage controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates
VCE_BBP x: Voltage controlled element of BBP of any busbar operates
VCE_BBP x & BBx is in service: VCE_BBP of any energized busbar operates
Op_Dly1_Pcnt_BBP: Stage 1 of backup busbar differential protection operates
Op_Dly2_Pcnt_BBP: Stage 2 of backup busbar differential protection operates
Op_TrpBB1_DPFC_BBP: DPFC percentage differential protection operates to trip BB1
Op_TrpBB1_Pcnt_BBP: Steady-state percentage differential protection operates to trip BB1
Op_TrpBC_BBP: BBP operates to trip BC breaker

3.3 Bus Coupler/Section (BC/BS) Protection


PCS-915 provides switch-onto-fault protection, breaker failure protection, end zone fault protection,
pole discrepancy protection and overcurrent protection for BC/BS.
3.3.1 BC/BS switch-onto-fault (SOTF) protection
After any busbar has been maintained and before being put into operation, it is needed to close
BC/BS and make the energizing test firstly. During the energizing process, if any fault occurs in the
energized busbar, SOTF protection will operate to trip BC/BS to clear the fault.
SOTF protection will be enabled for 300ms if any of the following conditions is met.
1.

The status of the binary input [BI_52b_BC] changes from 1 to 0.

2.

The binary input [BI_52b_BC] is energized and BC current changes from being smaller than
0.04IN to being greater than 0.04IN.

3.

The binary input [BI_52b_BC] is energized and BB1 and BB2 are in service.

The logic scheme of SOTF protection is shown as Figure 3.3-1.

3-11

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

[BI_52a_BC]
&
[BI_52b_BC]
BB1 is in service
&

&

0 300ms

BB2 is in service

&
&

Ia_BC>0.04IN
Ib_BC>0.04IN

&

Op_TrpBC_SOTF

Ic_BC>0.04IN
[En_SOTF_BC]
&

[VEBI_SOTF_BC]
[EBI_SOTF_BC]
Ia_BC>[I_OC_SOTF_BC]
Ib_BC>[I_OC_SOTF_BC]

Ic_BC>[I_OC_SOTF_BC]

Figure 3.3-1 Logic scheme of SOTF protection

Please refer to Chapter Settings about the description of corresponding settings.


Where:
BB1(2) is in service: If busbar phase voltage of BB1(2) is greater than 0.3UN or current of any
connected bay is larger than 0.04IN, BB1(2) is thought as in service.
[EBI_SOTF_BC]: The binary input of enabling BC SOTF protection
[BI_52b_BC]: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BC/BS
[BI_52a_BC]: Normally open auxiliary contact of BC/BS
Op_TrpBC_SOTF: BC/BS SOTF protection operates to trip BC/BS breaker
Ia_BC: Phase A current of BC/BS
Ib_BC: Phase B current of BC/BS
Ic_BC: Phase C current of BC/BS
3.3.2 BC/BS overcurrent protection
When temporary usage of the BC/BS breaker to substitute a feeder circuit breaker, typically for the
maintenance of the latter. Overcurrent protection can be provided for this application.
The logic scheme of overcurrent protection is shown as Figure 3.3-2.

3-12

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory
Ia_BC>[I_OC_BC]
Ib_BC>[I_OC_BC]

1
&

Ic_BC>[I_OC_BC]

[t_OC_BC]

Op_TrpBC_OC

[En_OC_BC]
&

[VEBI_OC_BC]
[EBI_OC_BC]

&

[t_OC_BC]

Op_TrpBC_ROC

3I0_BC>[I_ROC_BC]

Figure 3.3-2 Logic scheme of overcurrent protection

Please refer to Chapter Settings about the description of corresponding settings.


Where:
[EBI_OC_BC]: The binary input of enabling BC/BS overcurrent protection
Op_TrpBC_OC: Phase overcurrent protection of BC/BS operates to trip BC/BS
Op_TrpBC_ROC: Zero-sequence overcurrent protection of BC/BS operates to trip BC/BS
3I0_BC: Residual current of BC/BS
3.3.3 BC/BS breaker failure protection (BFP)
When tripping signal has been delivered to BC/BS breaker, while the breaker is failed to open
since the BC/BS current is still larger than the setting [I_BFP_BC] with a specific time delay, BFP
will operate to trip all feeders connected to both busbars with the time delay of [t_TrpBB_BFP_BC].
BC/BS breaker failure protection is blocked by voltage controlled element of BBP (Please refer to
Section 3.2.3).
There are several options to initiate BFP:
1.

BBP

2.

Breaker failure initiating binary inputs are energized

The logic scheme of BC/BS BFP is shown as Figure 3.3-3.

3-13

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

VCE_BBP 1
Ia_BC>[I_BFP_BC]
Ib_BC>[I_BFP_BC]

Ic_BC>[I_BFP_BC]
BBP Trip BC
&
BBP Trip BB1

[t_TrpBB_BFP_BC]

Op_BFP_BB1

BBP Trip BB2

&
1

[BI_BFI_BC_1]
&

&

[t_TrpBB_BFP_BC]

Op_BFP_BB2

[BI_BFI_BC_2]
VCE_BBP 2

Figure 3.3-3 The logic scheme of BFP

Please refer to Chapter Settings about the description of corresponding settings.


Where:
BI_BFI_BC_1: Initiating contact of breaker failure protection for BC/BS
BI_BFI_BC_2: Any binary input of the binary module located in slot No.09 is energized (in order to
prevent BC/BS BFP from mal-operation due to hardware fault of the binary input module.
VCE_BBP 1: voltage controlled element of BBP of BB1, Please refer to Section 3.2.3)
VCE_BBP 2: voltage controlled element of BBP of BB2, Please refer to Section 3.2.3)
3.3.4 BC/BS end zone fault protection
If a fault occurs between BC/BS breaker and BC/BS CT, the fault can not be cleared after busbar
on the breaker side is tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, a dedicated end zone fault
protection is provided.
After busbar differential protection sends the command to trip BC/BS, if the BC/BS breaker has
been tripped but the BC/BS current is detected, the end zone fault protection will operate and the
BC/BS current will be excluded from discriminative zone percentage differential circuit with a time
delay of 150ms.
If both busbars are in service and BC/BS breaker is open, in order to prevent both busbars from
being tripped during end fault, the BC/BS current will be excluded from discriminative zone
percentage differential circuit in this case.

3-14

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

BB No.1
BC CT

Dead zone

BC Breaker
BB No.2

The logic scheme of end zone fault protection is shown as Figure 3.3-4.

BB1 is in service
&
BB2 is in service
Ia_BC>0.04IN

0 400ms

&

Ib_BC>0.04IN

&

Ic_BC>0.04IN
[EBI_Decoupled_BC]
1

[BI_52a_BC]
&

&

[BI_52b_BC]

SP Trip BC

IBC is excluded from discriminative


zone percentage differential circuit

&

SP DIF
Ia_BC>0.1IN

&

Ib_BC>0.1IN

150ms

Ic_BC>0.1IN

Figure 3.3-4 The logic scheme of end zone fault protection

Please refer to Chapter Settings about the description of corresponding settings.


BB1(2) is in service: If busbar phase voltage of BB1(2) is greater than 0.3UN or current of any
connected bay is larger than 0.04IN, BB1(2) is thought as in service.
SP DIF: Steady-state percentage differential element for check zone
SP: Steady-state percentage differential element
3.3.5 BC/BS pole discrepancy protection (PD)
Pole discrepancy protection is designed for the case that pole discrepancy of BC/BS breaker is
detected due to one phase of BC/BS breaker is open.
3-15

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

Pole discrepancy protection is initiated by series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of BC/BS


breaker i.e. the binary input [BI_PD_BC].
In addition of series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of BC/BS breaker, residual and negative
sequence current are used as auxiliary criteria.
The logic scheme of pole discrepancy protection is shown as Figure 3.3-5.

[BI_PD_BC]
3I0_BC>[I_ROC_PD_BC]

&
1

&

[t_PD_BC]

Op_BC_PD

I2_BC>[I_NegOC_PD_BC]
[EBI_PD_BC]
&

[VEBI_PD_BC]
[En_PD_BC]
52b_A

52a_A

52b_B

52a_B

52b_C

52a_C

[BI_PD_BC]

Figure 3.3-5 The logic scheme of pole discrepancy protection

Please refer to Chapter Settings about the description of corresponding settings.


BI_PD_BC: pole discrepancy binary input of BC/BS
Op_BC_PD: pole discrepancy protection of BC/BS operates to trip BC/BS breaker
3I0_BC, I2_BC: Residual and negative sequence current of BC/BS.

3.4 Feeder breaker Failure Protection (BFP)


Breaker failure protection is available for each feeder. When a breaker is determined failed to trip,
the breaker failure protection will trip BC/BS after time delay of [t_TrpBC_BFP] and all feeders
after time delay of [t_TrpBB_BFP].
3.4.1 Initiation contact
For each bay, BFP can be initiated externally via binary inputs by phase-segregated tripping
contacts or three-phase tripping contacts of protective device for the corresponding bay.
1.

Phase-segregated tripping contact

[BI_A_BFI_Bayxx]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase A


[BI_B_BFI_Bayxx]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase B
[BI_C_BFI_Bayxx]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase C
3-16

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

xx=04~13, 16~25.
2.

Three-phase tripping contact

[BI_BFI_Bayxx]: The binary input for initiating BFP of three phases.


xx=02~25.
It is recommended that main transformer should be connected to the bays that only have the
dedicated opto-coupler used by three-phase tripping contact (bay 02, 03, 14, 15). For each bay
that main transformer is connected, a binary input for releasing voltage blocking element
[BI_Rls_VCE_BBP_Trans] is provided. For a transformer, when a fault occurs at the low-voltage
side but the breaker of the high-voltage side fails, the voltage condition of HV side busbar maybe
not met, so the other tripping contact can be connected to the the binary input
[BI_Rls_VCE_BBP_Trans] to release voltage blocking element.
If the bay is tripped by BBP, the breaker failure protection of this bay will be initiated.
For the bay that main transformer is connected, BFP operates can initiate intertripping to trip
breakers of other sides of the main transformer.
3.4.2 Current criterion
1.

Current criterion 1

Phase current is greater than the setting [I_OC_BFP_Bayxx]


2.

Current criterion 2

Residual current is greater than the setting [I_ROC_BFP_Bayxx]


3.

Current criterion 3

Negative sequence current is greater than the setting i.e. [I_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx]


3.4.3 Voltage control element of breaker failure protection(VCE)
Voltage control element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The criteria are:
UP[V_UV_VCE_BFP]

Equation 3.4-1

3U0[V_ROV_VCE_BFP]

Equation 3.4-2

U2[V_NegOV_VCE_BFP]

Equation 3.4-3

Where:
UP: Secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage
3U0: Residual voltage
U2: Negative sequence voltage
[V_UV_VCE_BFP]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BFP
3-17

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

[V_ROV_VCE_BFP]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BFP


[V_NegOV_VCE_BFP]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BFP
When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, the criteria of voltage control element will be changed.
UPP [V_UV_VCE_BFP]

Equation 3.4-4

U2[V_NegOV_VCE_BFP]

Equation 3.4-5

Where:
UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage
U2: Negative sequence voltage
[V_UV_VCE_BFP]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BFP
[V_NegOV_VCE_BFP]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BFP
3.4.4 Logic scheme
The logic scheme of BFP is shown as Figure 3.4-1.
[BI_BFI_Bayxx]
1
BBP operates to trip feeder xx

&
1

Ia_Bayxx>[I_OC_BFP_Bayxx]
&
[BI_A_BFI_Bayxx]
Ib_Bayxx>[I_OC_BFP_Bayxx]
&
[BI_B_BFI_Bayxx]
Ic_Bayxx>[I_OC_BFP_Bayxx]
&
[BI_C_BFI_Bayxx]

1
[En_ROC_BFP_Bayxx]

1
&

&
3I0_Bayxx>[I_ROC_BFP_Bayxx]
[En_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx]

&
&

I2_Bayxx>[I_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx]
[t_ReTrp_BFP]

[VEBI_BFP]
&
[EBI_BFP]

&

[t_TrpBC_BFP]

Op_Retrip_Bayxx
Op_TrpBC_BFP

[En_BFP]
&

Disconnector position of BB1

[t_TrpBB_BFP]

Op_BFP_BB1

&
VCE 1

[t_ReTrp_BFP]

&

VCE 2
&

[t_TrpBC_BFP]
[t_TrpBB_BFP]

Disconnector position of BB2

Op_Retrip_Bayxx
Op_TrpBC_BFP
Op_BFP_BB2

Figure 3.4-1 The logic scheme of BFP (for the bay that main transformer is not connected)
3-18

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory
Ia_Bayxx>[I_OC_BFP_Bayxx]
Ib_Bayxx>[I_OC_BFP_Bayxx]
1
Ic_Bayxx>[I_OC_BFP_Bayxx]
&

BBP operates to trip feeder xx


1
[BI_BFI_Bayxx]

[En_ROC_BFP_Bayxx]

&

&
3I0_Bayxx>[I_ROC_BFP_Bayxx]
[En_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx]

&
&

I2_Bayxx>[I_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx]
[EBI_BFP]

&

[VEBI_BFP]

&

[En_BFP]

[t_ReTrp_BFP]
[t_TrpBC_BFP]

Op_ReTrp_Bayxx
Op_TrpBC_BFP

VCE 1
1

&

[t_TrpBB_BFP]

&

[BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans]

Op_BFP_BB1
Op_IntTrp_BFP_Bayxx

Disconnector position of BB1


1
VCE 2

&

[t_ReTrp_BFP]

Op_ReTrp_Bayxx

&
[t_TrpBC_BFP]

Op_TrpBC_BFP

Disconnector position of BB2


[t_TrpBB_BFP]

Op_BFP_BB2
Op_IntTrp_BFP_Bayxx

Figure 3.4-2 The logic scheme of BFP (for the bay that main transformer is connected)

Please refer to Chapter Settings about the description of corresponding settings.


3I0_Bayxx: Residual current of bay xx
I2_Bayxx: The negative sequence current of bay xx
Ia_Bayxx: The phase A current of bay xx
Ib_Bayxx: The phase B current of bay xx
Ic_Bayxx: The phase C current of bay xx
Disconnector position of BBx: bay xx is connected to BBx (according to disconnector position of the
bay)

3.5 Identification of disconnector position


In a substation with double busbars layout, feeders may be switched from one busbar to the other
busbar during operation, and it is necessary to identify real time topology of the busbar correctly.
Disconnector positions are adopted for this identification and self-diagnosis is carried out
3-19

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

simultaneously. If there is current flowing in a bay but the bay has no disconnector positions for
dual busbars, the protective device can remember the original disconnector position. An
abnormality of disconnector position is detected and disconnector position alarms [Alm_DS_Bayxx]
will be issued with a specific time delay in any of the following cases (xx: from 02 to 25).
1.

Disconnector position is changed. The operator should check it and confirm whether it is
correct. The alarm can be reset by energizing the binary input [BI_ConfirmDS].

2.

If both disconnectors to BB1 and BB2 of a bay are closed, an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will
be issued. The alarm can not be reset by energizing the binary input [BI_ConfirmDS].

3.

There is current detected in a bay but the bay has no disconnector positions for dual busbars.
The alarm can not be reset by energizing the binary input [BI_ConfirmDS]. In this case, the
protective device can remember the original disconnector position of the bay, and check its
validity based on the current distribution of system.

4.

If discriminating zone differential current is greater than 0.04IN due to the wrong disconnector
position, an alarm will be issued with a time delay and the device can identify the right
disconnector position based on the current distribution of system.

Besides, in order to prevent the feeder from missing-operation because the bay has no
disconnector position, no matter which busbar zone does the fault occur in, the bays whose CT
correction coefficient is not zero but no disconnector position can be detected will be tripped.
Note!
When disconnector position alarm is issued, the operator must check the actual condition
at first and then energize the binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] to reset the alarm if it is correct.
Usually a button on the panel is provided, pressing the button will result in energizing the
binary input [BI_ConfirmDS].

3.6 VT Circuit Supervision


1.

If three times busbar negative sequence voltage (3U2) is larger than 0.2UN (UN: the secondary
rated phase-to-ground voltage of VT), an alarm [Alm_VTS_BB1] or [Alm_VTS_BB2] will be
issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

2.

If any busbar is in service and the sum of the amplitude of busbar three-phase voltage
(|UA|+|UB|+|UC|) is smaller than UN, an alarm [Alm_VTS_BB1] or [Alm_VTS_BB2] will be
issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

3.

When the logic setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, if three times busbar negative
sequence voltage (3U2) is greater than 0.2UN or any phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than
0.7UN_PP (UN_PP: the secondary rated phase-to-phase voltage of VT), an alarm
[Alm_VTS_BB1] or [Alm_VTS_BB2] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

If the fault detector element picks up due to a disturbance in the system, the VT circuit supervision

3-20

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

will be disabled. When VCE of a busbar operates, an alarm [Alm_Pkp_VCE_BB1] or


[Alm_Pkp_VCE_BB2] will be issued with a time delay of 3s. When the three-phase voltage returns
to normal condition, the alarm will be reset and the protective device will return to normal operation
condition automatically with a time delay of 10s.

3.7 CT Circuit Supervision


3.7.1 CT circuit failure
1.

If check zone differential current is greater than the setting [I_Alm_CTS], an alarm [Alm_CTS]
will be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP will be blocked. The alarm can be reset only by
pressing reset button on the panel to energize binary input [BI_RstTarg] after the CT circuit
returns to normal condition.

2.

If check zone differential current is smaller than the setting i.e. [I_Alm_CTS] and both
discriminating zone currents are greater than [I_Alm_CTS], an alarm [Alm_CTS_BC] will be
issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP will not be blocked but single busbar mode will be
enabled automatically. Under this situation, if any internal fault occurs, faulty busbar will not
be identified. The alarm can be reset only by pressing reset button on the panel to energize
the binary input [BI_RstTarg] even the CT circuit returns to normal condition.

When VCE of any busbar operates, CT circuit failure will not be detected.
3.7.2 CT circuit abnormality
1.

If check zone differential current is greater than the setting i.e. [I_Alm_SensCTS], an alarm
[Alm_SensCTS] will be issued with a time delay of 5s. The alarm can be reset only by
pressing reset button on the panel to energize the binary input [BI_RstTarg] after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition.

2.

If check zone differential current is smaller than the setting [I_Alm_SensCTS] and both
discriminating zone currents are greater than [I_Alm_SensCTS], an alarm
[Alm_SensCTS_BC] will be issued with a time delay of 5s. The alarm can be reset only by
pressing reset button on the panel to energize the binary input [BI_RstTarg] after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition.

3.

BBP will not be blocked when CT circuit is abnormal.

3.8 BC breaker substitution


If BC breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
binary input [EBI_BT_BC] should be energized. The binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should
be energized or de-energized according to the busbar arrangement. The polarity mark of feeder
CT is on the busbar side, if the polarity mark of the substituted BC CT is on the busbar side, the
binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should be de-energized and BC current will be calculated in
check zone differential current and discriminating zone differential current. If the polarity mark of
the substituting BC CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should be
3-21

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

energized and negative value of BC current will be calculated in check zone differential current
and discriminating zone differential current.
If BC breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers, the BC current will be taken
as the current of the substituted feeder, whether the positive value or the negative value of the
substituting BC current is calculated in check zone differential current and discriminating zone
differential current depends on the status of the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT].
If the normally open auxiliary contact of substituting disconnector of BBx [BI_52a_DSBBx_BT] is
energized, the BC breaker is substituting through BBx, and the BC current will be calculated in
discriminating zone differential current of BBx.
When BC breaker is used to substitute any of feeder breakers, some protection elements (such as
SOTF protection, EFP and BFP) of BC will quit automatically, but overcurrent protection and pole
disagreement protection are still reserved, which can be used as the protection function of the
substituted feeder. In addition, some functions for BC breaker is used as a tie breaker connecting
two busbars are also quit (such as: tripping BC breaker when busbar internal fault happens).
Note!
[EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should be energized prior to [EBI_BT_BC].
1.

Energizing the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT]

Transfer Busbar
*

BB1

BC
BB2

Figure 3.8-1 BC breaker substituting through BB2

The polarity mark of BC CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should
be energized. Negative value of BC current will be calculated in check zone differential current and
discriminating zone differential current of BB2.
2.

De-energizing the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT]

3-22

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

Transfer Busbar
*

BB2
*
BC1
BB1

Figure 3.8-2 BC breaker substituting through BB1

The polarity mark of BC CT is on the busbar side, the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should
not be energized. Positve value of BC current will be calculated in check zone differential current
and discriminating zone differential current of BB1.

3-23

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

3 Operation Theory

3-24

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision

4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4 Supervision ..................................................................................... 4-a
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Protective Device Supervision ....................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Hardware supervision .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.3 Binary output supervision .................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.4 Binary input supervision ...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.5 Setting supervision .............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.6 Test Mode Supervision ........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.7 Hardware Configuration Supervision................................................................................... 4-2

4.3 AC Circuit Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2


4.3.1 Voltage and current drift supervision and auto-adjustment ................................................. 4-2
4.3.2 Sample supervision ............................................................................................................. 4-2

4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision ...................................................................... 4-2


4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) .............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) ............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.3 Disconnector position supervision ....................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.4 BC breaker supervision ....................................................................................................... 4-3

4.5 Handle Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-3


4.5.1 List of self-supervision report............................................................................................... 4-3
4.5.2 Self-Supervision Alarm List.................................................................................................. 4-7
4.5.3 Repairmen suggestion of self-supervision report ...............................................................4-11

Table of Tables
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report ........................................................................................... 4-3
Table 4.5-2 Equipment self-check alarm list................................................................................ 4-7
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-a
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision

Table 4.5-3 Repairmen suggestion .......................................................................................... 4-11

4-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision

4.1 Overview
PCS-915 is a microprocessor based busbar protection which can provide successive automatic
supervision to the protected object to ensure the power system can quickly restore from any fault
to normal state. When the device is in energizing process before the LED HEALTHY is lightened,
operators need to check the device operating state to ensure the automatic supervision function
can work normally.
The device will be blocked if there is any severe problem occurs in the hardware module or
software program. Before reboot the relay, users are recommended to solve the problem or return
the feedbacks to NR.
When a failure is detected in the system, the fault message will be displayed on the LCD and the
corresponding LED will be lightened. Meanwhile, the corresponding alarm output contacts will be
energized and the failure alarm will be recorded and stored in the device. Users can either view
the fault report directly on LCD or print out the report.
The automatic supervision of PCS-915 has advantages in independent operation to the protection
functions and is capable to identify the fault location when the fault occurs in the system.

4.2 Protective Device Supervision


4.2.1 Hardware supervision
The automatic supervision function can provide monitoring of all chips on protection DSP module
and fault detector DSP module to prevent any damaged or errors during the normal operation. The
alarm signals [Alm_DSP_ProtBrd] or [Alm_DSP_FDBrd] will be issued if any damages or errors
are dectected and the device will be blocked.

4.2.2 Opto-coupler Power Supervision


The automatic supervision can continuously monitor the positive power supply of opto-coupler, if a
failure or damage is detected, then the alarm signal [Alm_Pwr_BI_Bxx] will be issued (xx is the slot
No. of corresponding binary input module).

4.2.3 Binary output supervision


The state of binary outputs of each BO module is continually monitored. If any abnormality is
detected, the alarm signals [Alm_Output_Bxx] will be issued with device being blocked (xx is the
slot No. of corresponding BO module).

4.2.4 Binary input supervision


The state of binary inputs detected by protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module
should be the same. Otherwise, the protective device will be blocked.
If binary input [BI_Blk_BBP] is energized for over 1s, the alarm [Alm_Blk_BBP] will be issued and
the blocking for BBP will be released.
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-1
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision

If any binary input for initiating feeder BFP is energized for over 10s, the alarm
[Alm_PersistFD_BFP] will be issued with BFP blocked.

4.2.5 Setting supervision


PCS-915 has 10 setting groups, while only one group is active at one time. The settings of active
setting group are checked, if any is out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal
[Alm_Setting_Out-of-Range] will be issued with the protective device be blocked.
If the EEPROM on protection DSP module or fault detector DSP module is damaged, it will lead to
any summation error of all setting groups, the alarms [Alm_Setting] and [Alm_Setting_FDBrd] or
[Alm_Setting_ProtBrd] will be issued with the protective device blocked.

4.2.6 Test Mode Supervision


When protection equipment is set to test mode by configuring the corresponding logic setting, the
alarm signal [Alm_BO_Test] is issued without blocking equipment.

4.2.7 Hardware Configuration Supervision


Module configuration is checked automatically during equipment initialization, if the plug-in module
configuration is not consistent with the design drawing of a specific project, the alarm signal
[Alm_BrdConfig] is issued with the equipment being blocked.

4.3 AC Circuit Supervision


4.3.1 Voltage and current drift supervision and auto-adjustment
The voltage and current drift are influenced by the variation of temperature or other environment
factors. PCS-915 can continually and automatically trace the drift value and adjust it to normal
value.

4.3.2 Sample supervision


The device can provide monitoring of AC current and voltage samplings for protection DSP
module and fault detector DSP module. If the detected values are wrong or inconsistent, an alarm
[Alm_Sample_xx] will be issued and the relay will be blocked.

4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision


4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)
The VTS logic in the relay is used to detect the VT secondary circuit to ensure that voltage
measured is the actual value of power system. When VT circuit failure is detected, equipment can
automatically adjust the configuration of protective elements whose stability would be affected by
voltage element to avoid maloperation. Please refer to Section 3.6 for detail.

4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)


The CTS logic can detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure the measured current is the actual
4-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision

value of power system. The main purpose is to detect faults in the secondary circuits of CT and to
avoid influences on corresponding protection functions. Please refer to Section 3.7 for details.

4.4.3 Disconnector position supervision


For double busbars with bus coupler arrangement, disconnector position is monitored by the
automatic supervision function to ensure the correct operation of protective device. Please refer to
Section 3.5 for details.

4.4.4 BC breaker supervision


If normally closed auxiliary contact of bus coupler/section breaker is energized, but current is still
detected for the breaker, an alarm [Alm_52b_BC] will be issued without the protective device
blocked.

4.5 Handle Alarm


PCS-915 can provide self-supervision of hardware circuit and device operation status. When any
unnormal condition is detected, the fault information or report can be displayed and a
corresponding alarm will be issued.
A common abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other
functions can still work. However, if serious hardware failure or abnormality were detected, all
protection functions will be blocked and the LED HEALTHY will be extinguished and blocking
signal will be given by output the contact [BO_FAIL]. The protective device then cannot work
normally and maintenance is required to eliminate the failure.
Note!
If the protective device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find
out its reason with the help of self-diagnose record. If the reason can not be found at site,
please notice the factory NR. Please do not simply energize the resetting binary input
[BI_RstTarg] or re-power on the protective device.

4.5.1 List of self-supervision report


Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report

No.

Alarm Message

Indicator LED
HEALTHY

MISC_ALM

VT/CT_ALM

DS_ALM

Alm_Device

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Fail_Device

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Fail_SettingItem_Chgd

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alm_Version

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alm_BO_Test

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alm_BoardConfig

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-3
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Alarm Message

Indicator LED
HEALTHY

MISC_ALM

VT/CT_ALM

DS_ALM

Alm_TimeSync

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

Alm_VTS_BB1

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

10

Alm_VTS_BB2

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

11

Alm_Pkp_VCE_BB1

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

12

Alm_Pkp_VCE_BB2

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

13

Alm_CTS

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

14

Alm_SensCTS

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

15

Alm_CTS_BC

GREEN

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

16

Alm_SensCTS_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

17

Alm_52a/52b_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

18

Alm_52b_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

19

Alm_PersistFD_BFP_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

20

Alm_PersistFD_OC_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

21

Alm_PersistFD_ROC_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

22

Alm_PersistFD_SOTF_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

23

Alm_PersistFD

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

24

Alm_PD_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

25

Alm_BI_BFI_1_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

26

Alm_BI_BFI_2_BC

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

27

Alm_Sample_BC

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

28

Alm_Sample_Bay02

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

29

Alm_Sample_Bay03

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

30

Alm_Sample_Bay04

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

31

Alm_Sample_Bay05

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

32

Alm_Sample_Bay06

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

33

Alm_Sample_Bay07

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

34

Alm_Sample_Bay08

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

35

Alm_Sample_Bay09

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

36

Alm_Sample_Bay10

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

37

Alm_Sample_Bay11

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

38

Alm_Sample_Bay12

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

39

Alm_Sample_Bay13

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

40

Alm_Sample_Bay14

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

41

Alm_Sample_Bay15

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

42

Alm_Sample_Bay16

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

43

Alm_Sample_Bay17

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

44

Alm_Sample_Bay18

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

45

Alm_Sample_Bay19

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

46

Alm_Sample_Bay20

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

47

Alm_Sample_Bay21

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

48

Alm_Sample_Bay22

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

4-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Alarm Message

Indicator LED
HEALTHY

MISC_ALM

VT/CT_ALM

DS_ALM

49

Alm_Sample_Bay23

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

50

Alm_Sample_Bay24

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

51

Alm_Sample_Bay25

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

52

Alm_VoltSample_BB1

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

53

Alm_VoltSample_BB2

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

54

Alm_PersistFD_Pcnt_BBP

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

55

Alm_PersistFD_DPFC_BBP

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

56

Alm_Fail_PersistFD

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

57

Alm_Blk_BBP

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

58

Alm_IntLink

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

59

Alm_PersistFD_BFP

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

60

Alm_Output_B12

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

61

Alm_Output_B13

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

62

Alm_Output_B14

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

63

Alm_Output_B15

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

64

Alm_Output_B30

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

65

Alm_Output_B31

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

66

Alm_Output_B32

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

67

Alm_Pwr_BI_B04

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

68

Alm_Pwr_BI_B05

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

69

Alm_Pwr_BI_B06

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

70

Alm_Pwr_BI_B07

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

71

Alm_Pwr_BI_B08

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

72

Alm_Pwr_BI_B09

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

73

Alm_Pwr_BI_B10

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

74

Alm_Pwr_BI_B11

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

75

Alm_Setting_ProtBrd

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

76

Alm_Setting_FDBrd

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

77

Alm_Setting

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

78

Alm_DSP_ProtBrd

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

79

Alm_DSP_FDBrd

OFF

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

80

Alm_DS_Bay02

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

81

Alm_DS_Bay03

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

82

Alm_DS_Bay04

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

83

Alm_DS_Bay05

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

84

Alm_DS_Bay06

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

85

Alm_DS_Bay07

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

86

Alm_DS_Bay08

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

87

Alm_DS_Bay09

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

88

Alm_DS_Bay10

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

89

Alm_DS_Bay11

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-5
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Alarm Message

Indicator LED
HEALTHY

MISC_ALM

VT/CT_ALM

DS_ALM

90

Alm_DS_Bay12

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

91

Alm_DS_Bay13

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

92

Alm_DS_Bay14

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

93

Alm_DS_Bay15

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

94

Alm_DS_Bay16

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

95

Alm_DS_Bay17

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

96

Alm_DS_Bay18

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

97

Alm_DS_Bay19

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

98

Alm_DS_Bay20

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

99

Alm_DS_Bay21

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

100

Alm_DS_Bay22

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

101

Alm_DS_Bay23

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

102

Alm_DS_Bay24

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

103

Alm_DS_Bay25

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

104

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay02

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

105

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay03

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

106

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay04

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

107

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay05

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

108

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay06

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

109

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay07

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

110

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay08

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

111

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay09

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

112

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay10

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

113

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay11

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

114

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay12

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

115

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay13

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

116

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay14

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

117

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay15

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

118

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay16

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

119

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay17

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

120

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay18

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

121

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay19

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

122

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay20

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

123

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay21

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

124

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay22

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

125

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay23

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

126

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay24

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

127

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay25

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

128

Alm_BI_BFI_BT

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

129

Alm_DS_BT

GREEN

OFF

OFF

YELLOW

130

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_1

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

4-6

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Indicator LED

Alarm Message

HEALTHY

MISC_ALM

VT/CT_ALM

DS_ALM

131

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_2

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

132

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_3

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

133

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_4

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

134

Alm_BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans

GREEN

YELLOW

OFF

OFF

4.5.2 Self-Supervision Alarm List


Table 4.5-2 Equipment self-check alarm list
No.

Alarm Message

Meaning Description

Alm_Device

Any alarm signal(s) is(are) issued.

Fail_Device

Any alarm signal(s) that will lead blocking of the device is(are) issued.

Fail_SettingItem_Chgd

Alm_Version

Alm_BO_Test

The relay is in test mode.

Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope

Setting value is out of setting scope.

Alm_BoardConfig

Alm_TimeSync

Time synchronism is abnormal.

Alm_VTS_BB1

VT circuit failure of BB1 is detected.

10

Alm_VTS_BB2

VT circuit failure of BB2 is detected.

11

Alm_Pkp_VCE_BB1

Voltage controlled element of BB1 operates.

12

Alm_Pkp_VCE_BB2

Voltage controlled element of BB2 operates.

13

Alm_CTS

CT circuit failure is detected.

14

Alm_SensCTS

CT circuit is abnormal.

15

Alm_CTS_BC

BC CT circuit failure is detected.

16

Alm_SensCTS_BC

BC CT circuit is abnormal.

17

Alm_52a/52b_BC

18

Alm_52b_BC

19

Alm_PersistFD_BFP_BC

20

Alm_PersistFD_OC_BC

21

Alm_PersistFD_ROC_BC

22

Alm_PersistFD_SOTF_BC

23

Alm_PersistFD

After config file is updated, settings of the file and settings saved on the
device are not matched.
Version information of system program or DSP program is not
consistent with that defined in the standard device program.

Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the


designing drawing of an applied-specific project.

Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of BC breaker are


energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s.
Normally closed auxiliary contact of BC breaker is energized but there
is current detected.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BC BFP picks up for over
10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BC/BS phase overcurrent
element picks up for over 10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BC/BS ground overcurrent
element picks up for over 10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection
picks up for over 10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for any protection element
picks up for over 10s.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-7
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Alarm Message

Meaning Description
The pole discrepancy binary input of BC/BS [BI_PD_BC] is energized

24

Alm_PD_BC

25

Alm_BI_BFI_1_BC

26

Alm_BI_BFI_2_BC

27

Alm_Sample_BC

Sampling value of BC/BS is different between two DSP modules.

28

Alm_Sample_Bay02

Sampling value of bay 02 is different between two DSP modules.

29

Alm_Sample_Bay03

Sampling value of bay 03 is different between two DSP modules.

30

Alm_Sample_Bay04

Sampling value of bay 04 is different between two DSP modules.

31

Alm_Sample_Bay05

Sampling value of bay 05 is different between two DSP modules.

32

Alm_Sample_Bay06

Sampling value of bay 06 is different between two DSP modules.

33

Alm_Sample_Bay07

Sampling value of bay 07 is different between two DSP modules.

34

Alm_Sample_Bay08

Sampling value of bay 08 is different between two DSP modules.

35

Alm_Sample_Bay09

Sampling value of bay 09 is different between two DSP modules.

36

Alm_Sample_Bay10

Sampling value of bay 10 is different between two DSP modules.

37

Alm_Sample_Bay11

Sampling value of bay 11 is different between two DSP modules.

38

Alm_Sample_Bay12

Sampling value of bay 12 is different between two DSP modules.

39

Alm_Sample_Bay13

Sampling value of bay 13 is different between two DSP modules.

40

Alm_Sample_Bay14

Sampling value of bay 14 is different between two DSP modules.

41

Alm_Sample_Bay15

Sampling value of bay 15 is different between two DSP modules.

42

Alm_Sample_Bay16

Sampling value of bay 16 is different between two DSP modules.

43

Alm_Sample_Bay17

Sampling value of bay 17 is different between two DSP modules.

44

Alm_Sample_Bay18

Sampling value of bay 18 is different between two DSP modules.

45

Alm_Sample_Bay19

Sampling value of bay 19 is different between two DSP modules.

46

Alm_Sample_Bay20

Sampling value of bay 20 is different between two DSP modules.

47

Alm_Sample_Bay21

Sampling value of bay 21 is different between two DSP modules.

48

Alm_Sample_Bay22

Sampling value of bay 22 is different between two DSP modules.

49

Alm_Sample_Bay23

Sampling value of bay 23 is different between two DSP modules.

50

Alm_Sample_Bay24

Sampling value of bay 24 is different between two DSP modules.

51

Alm_Sample_Bay25

Sampling value of bay 25 is different between two DSP modules.

52

Alm_VoltSample_BB1

53

Alm_VoltSample_BB2

54

Alm_PersistFD_Pcnt_BBP

Steady-state BBP fault detector picks up for over 10s.

55

Alm_PersistFD_DPFC_BBP

DPFC BBP fault detector picks up for over 10s.

56

Alm_Fail_PersistFD

Device is blocked for over 10s.

57

Alm_Blk_BBP

Binary input of blocking BBP externally is energized for over 1s.

58

Alm_IntLink

59

Alm_PersistFD_BFP

for over 10s.


Binary input for initiating BC/BS BFP is energized for over 10s.
Any binary input of the binary module located in slot No.09 is
energized for over 10s.

Sampling value of voltage of BB1 is different between two DSP


modules.
Sampling value of voltage of BB2 is different between two DSP
modules.

Both disconnectors of any feeder for BB1 and BB2 are closed at the
same time.
Duration of pickup of BFP fault detector on protection module is in
excess of 10s.

4-8

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Alarm Message

Meaning Description
Driving transistors of binary output module located in slot No.12 are

60

Alm_Output_B12

61

Alm_Output_B13

62

Alm_Output_B14

63

Alm_Output_B15

64

Alm_Output_B30

65

Alm_Output_B31

66

Alm_Output_B32

67

Alm_Pwr_BI_B04

68

Alm_Pwr_BI_B05

69

Alm_Pwr_BI_B06

70

Alm_Pwr_BI_B07

71

Alm_Pwr_BI_B08

72

Alm_Pwr_BI_B09

73

Alm_Pwr_BI_B10

74

Alm_Pwr_BI_B11

75

Alm_Setting_ProtBrd

Settings of protection DSP module are set to be unreasonable.

76

Alm_Setting_FDBrd

Settings of fault detector DSP module are set to be unreasonable.

77

Alm_Setting

Settings of any DSP module are set to be unreasonable.

78

Alm_DSP_ProtBrd

DSP chip on protection module is damaged.

79

Alm_DSP_FDBrd

DSP chip on fault detector module is damaged.

80

Alm_DS_Bay02

Disconnector position of bay 02 is abnormal.

81

Alm_DS_Bay03

Disconnector position of bay 03 is abnormal.

82

Alm_DS_Bay04

Disconnector position of bay 04 is abnormal.

83

Alm_DS_Bay05

Disconnector position of bay 05 is abnormal.

84

Alm_DS_Bay06

Disconnector position of bay 06 is abnormal.

85

Alm_DS_Bay07

Disconnector position of bay 07 is abnormal.

86

Alm_DS_Bay08

Disconnector position of bay 08 is abnormal.

damaged.
Driving transistors of binary output module located in slot No.13 are
damaged.
Driving transistors of binary output module located in slot No.14 are
damaged.
Driving transistors of binary output module located in slot No.15 are
damaged.
Driving transistors of binary output module located in slot No.30 are
damaged.
Driving transistors of binary output module located in slot No.31 are
damaged.
Driving transistors of binary output module located in slot No.32 are
damaged.
Loss of power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module
located in slot No.04.
Loss of power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module
located in slot No.05.
Loss of power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module
located in slot No.06.
Loss of power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module
located in slot No.07.
Loss of power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module
located in slot No.08.
Loss of power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module
located in slot No.09.
Loss of power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module
located in slot No.10.
Loss of power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module
located in slot No.11.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-9
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Alarm Message

Meaning Description

87

Alm_DS_Bay09

Disconnector position of bay 09 is abnormal.

88

Alm_DS_Bay10

Disconnector position of bay 10 is abnormal.

89

Alm_DS_Bay11

Disconnector position of bay 11 is abnormal.

90

Alm_DS_Bay12

Disconnector position of bay 12 is abnormal.

91

Alm_DS_Bay13

Disconnector position of bay 13 is abnormal.

92

Alm_DS_Bay14

Disconnector position of bay 14 is abnormal.

93

Alm_DS_Bay15

Disconnector position of bay 15 is abnormal.

94

Alm_DS_Bay16

Disconnector position of bay 16 is abnormal.

95

Alm_DS_Bay17

Disconnector position of bay 17 is abnormal.

96

Alm_DS_Bay18

Disconnector position of bay 18 is abnormal.

97

Alm_DS_Bay19

Disconnector position of bay 19 is abnormal.

98

Alm_DS_Bay20

Disconnector position of bay 20 is abnormal.

99

Alm_DS_Bay21

Disconnector position of bay 21 is abnormal.

100

Alm_DS_Bay22

Disconnector position of bay 22 is abnormal.

101

Alm_DS_Bay23

Disconnector position of bay 23 is abnormal.

102

Alm_DS_Bay24

Disconnector position of bay 24 is abnormal.

103

Alm_DS_Bay25

Disconnector position of bay 25 is abnormal.

104

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay02

Binary input of initiating bay 02 BFP is energized for over 10s.

105

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay03

Binary input of initiating bay 03 BFP is energized for over 10s.

106

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay04

Binary input of initiating bay 04 BFP is energized for over 10s.

107

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay05

Binary input of initiating bay 05 BFP is energized for over 10s.

108

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay06

Binary input of initiating bay 06 BFP is energized for over 10s.

109

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay07

Binary input of initiating bay 07 BFP is energized for over 10s.

110

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay08

Binary input of initiating bay 08 BFP is energized for over 10s.

111

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay09

Binary input of initiating bay 09 BFP is energized for over 10s.

112

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay10

Binary input of initiating bay 10 BFP is energized for over 10s.

113

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay11

Binary input of initiating bay 11 BFP is energized for over 10s.

114

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay12

Binary input of initiating bay 12 BFP is energized for over 10s.

115

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay13

Binary input of initiating bay 13 BFP is energized for over 10s.

116

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay14

Binary input of initiating bay 14 BFP is energized for over 10s.

117

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay15

Binary input of initiating bay 15 BFP is energized for over 10s.

118

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay16

Binary input of initiating bay 16 BFP is energized for over 10s.

119

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay17

Binary input of initiating bay 17 BFP is energized for over 10s.

120

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay18

Binary input of initiating bay 18 BFP is energized for over 10s.

121

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay19

Binary input of initiating bay 19 BFP is energized for over 10s.

122

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay20

Binary input of initiating bay 20 BFP is energized for over 10s.

123

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay21

Binary input of initiating bay 21 BFP is energized for over 10s.

124

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay22

Binary input of initiating bay 22 BFP is energized for over 10s.

125

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay23

Binary input of initiating bay 23 BFP is energized for over 10s.

126

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay24

Binary input of initiating bay 24 BFP is energized for over 10s.

127

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay25

Binary input of initiating bay 25 BFP is energized for over 10s.

128

Alm_BI_BFI_BT

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for BC (when BC is substituted a

4-10

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Alarm Message

Meaning Description
feeder breaker) is energized for over 10s.

129

Alm_DS_BT

130

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_1

131

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_2

132

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_3

133

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_4

134

Alm_BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans

Substituting disconnector position is abnormal (when BC is substituted


a feeder breaker).
Any of the initiating contact of BFP of the binary module located in slot
No.06 is abnormal.
Any of the initiating contact of BFP of the binary module located in slot
No.07 is abnormal.
Any of the initiating contact of BFP of the binary module located in slot
No.08 is abnormal.
Any of the initiating contact of BFP of the binary module located in slot
No.09 is abnormal.
Binary input of releasing voltage blocking element for BFP of main
transformer bay is energized for over 10s.

4.5.3 Repairmen suggestion of self-supervision report


Table 4.5-3 Repairmen suggestion
No.

Self-supervision Report

Suggestion

Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope

Alm_BoardConfig

Alm_Sample_BC

Alm_Sample_Bay02

Alm_Sample_Bay03

Alm_Sample_Bay04

Alm_Sample_Bay05

Alm_Sample_Bay06

Alm_Sample_Bay07

10

Alm_Sample_Bay08

11

Alm_Sample_Bay09

12

Alm_Sample_Bay10

Put the protective device out of service at once. Inform the factory or

13

Alm_Sample_Bay11

agency to maintain it.

14

Alm_Sample_Bay12

15

Alm_Sample_Bay13

16

Alm_Sample_Bay14

17

Alm_Sample_Bay15

18

Alm_Sample_Bay16

19

Alm_Sample_Bay17

20

Alm_Sample_Bay18

21

Alm_Sample_Bay19

22

Alm_Sample_Bay20

23

Alm_Sample_Bay21

24

Alm_Sample_Bay22

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-11
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Self-supervision Report

25

Alm_Sample_Bay23

26

Alm_Sample_Bay24

27

Alm_Sample_Bay25

28

Alm_VoltSample_BB1

29

Alm_VoltSample_BB2

30

Alm_Output_B12

31

Alm_Output_B13

32

Alm_Output_B14

33

Alm_Output_B15

34

Alm_Output_B30

35

Alm_Output_B31

36

Alm_Output_B32

37

Alm_Setting_ProtBrd

38

Alm_Setting_FDBrd

39

Alm_Setting

40

Alm_DSP_ProtBrd

41

Alm_DSP_FDBrd

42

Alm_Version

43

Alm_Device

44

Fail_Device

Suggestion

Please refer to other alarm information


Please check the settings mentioned in the prompt message on the

45

Fail_SettingItem_Chgd

LCD, and go to the menu Settings and select Confirm Settings


item to comfirm settings. Then, the device will restore to normal
operation stage.

46

47

48

Alm_PersistFD_OC_BC

Check whether the corresponding setting is reasonable and check


whether the measured current equals to the actual current

Alm_PersistFD_ROC_BC

Check whether the corresponding setting is reasonable and check


whether the measured current equals to the actual current

Alm_PersistFD_SOTF_BC

Check whether the corresponding setting is reasonable and check


whether the measured current equals to the actual current

49

Alm_PersistFD

Refer to other FD element alarm signal

50

Alm_PD_BC

Check the corresponding pole discrepancy binary input


Step1: check whether the selected clock synchronization mode
matches the clock

synchronization source;

Step 2: check whether the wiring connection between the equipment


and the clock synchronization source is correct
51

Alm_TimeSync

Step 3: check whether the setting for selecting clock synchronization


(i.e. [Opt_TimeSync]) is set correctly. If there is no clock
synchronization, please set the setting [Opt_TimeSync] as No
TimeSync.
After the abnormality is removed, the ALARM LED will be
extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will disappear

4-12

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Self-supervision Report

Suggestion
and the equipment will restore to normal operation state.

52

Alm_52b_BC

53

Alm_52a/52b_BC

54

Alm_VTS_BB1

55

Alm_VTS_BB2

56

Alm_Pkp_VCE_BB1

57

Alm_Pkp_VCE_BB2

58

Alm_CTS

59

Alm_SensCTS

60

Alm_CTS_BC

61

Alm_SensCTS_BC

62

Alm_BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans

63

Alm_BI_BFI_1_BC

Check auxiliary contact of BC/BS breaker

Check VT secondary circuit

Check CT secondary circuit

Check the contact of initiating BFP including the contact of releasing


voltage blocking
Check the contact of initiating BC/BS BFP externally
Check the contact of initiating BC/BS BFP externally and check

64

Alm_PersistFD_BFP_BC

whether the protective element (which can initiate BC/BS BFP) drops
off.

65

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay02

66

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay03

67

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay04

68

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay05

69

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay06

70

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay07

71

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay08

72

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay09

73

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay10

74

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay11

75

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay12

76

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay13

77

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay14

78

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay15

79

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay16

80

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay17

81

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay18

82

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay19

83

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay20

84

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay21

85

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay22

86

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay23

87

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay24

88

Alm_BI_BFI_Bay25

89

Alm_BI_BFI_BT

Check the the binary input of breaker failure initiaton of corresponding


bay.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-13
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Self-supervision Report

Suggestion

90

Alm_PersistFD_BFP

91

Alm_Fail_PersistFD

92

Alm_BO_Test

93

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_1

Check all the binary inputs of the BI module located in slot No.6

94

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_2

Check all the binary inputs of the BI module located in slot No.7

95

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_3

Check all the binary inputs of the BI module located in slot No.8

96

Alm_BI_Chk_BFI_4

97

Alm_BI_BFI_2_BC

98

Alm_Blk_BBP

99

Alm_Pwr_BI_B04

100

Alm_Pwr_BI_B05

101

Alm_Pwr_BI_B06

102

Alm_Pwr_BI_B07

103

Alm_Pwr_BI_B08

104

Alm_Pwr_BI_B09

105

Alm_Pwr_BI_B10

106

Alm_Pwr_BI_B11

107

Alm_PersistFD_Pcnt_BBP

108

Alm_PersistFD_DPFC_BBP

109

Alm_DS_Bay02

110

Alm_DS_Bay03

111

Alm_DS_Bay04

112

Alm_DS_Bay05

113

Alm_DS_Bay06

114

Alm_DS_Bay07

115

Alm_DS_Bay08

116

Alm_DS_Bay09

117

Alm_DS_Bay10

118

Alm_DS_Bay11

119

Alm_DS_Bay12

120

Alm_DS_Bay13

121

Alm_DS_Bay14

122

Alm_DS_Bay15

123

Alm_DS_Bay16

124

Alm_DS_Bay17

125

Alm_DS_Bay18

126

Alm_DS_Bay19

127

Alm_DS_Bay20

128

Alm_DS_Bay21

129

Alm_DS_Bay22

130

Alm_DS_Bay23

Please refer to the other alarm signal to confirm the blocking reason
No special treatment is needed, and only wait for the completion of
testing

Check all the binary inputs of the BI module located in slot No.9
Check the contact of blocking BBP externally

Check the power circuit of the DC module and I/O module

Check CT secondary circuit including CT polarity

Check auxiliary contact of disconnector

4-14

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision
No.

Self-supervision Report

131

Alm_DS_Bay24

132

Alm_DS_Bay25

133

Alm_DS_BT

134

Alm_IntLink

Suggestion

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

4-15
Date: 2012-08-31

4 Supervision

4-16

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

5 Measurement and Recording

5 Measurement and Recording


Table of Contents
5 Measurement and Recording.......................................................... 5-a
5.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Metering ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 Analogue input quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 (Have been converted to the
referenced side)......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Phase angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ......................................................... 5-1
5.2.3 Debug values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ....................................................... 5-2

5.3 Event & fault Records ...................................................................................... 5-2


5.3.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2 Event Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording .................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.4 Present Recording............................................................................................................ 5-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

5-a
Date: 2013-06-03

5 Measurement and Recording

5-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

5 Measurement and Recording

5.1 General Description


PCS-915 busbar protection can provide auxiliary functions such as on-line data metering, binary
input status, event and disturbance recording, to meet the demands of the modern power grid
requirements.

5.2 Metering
PCS-915 can provide continuous measurements of analogue input quantities. The measurement
data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or by the software interface on
the local or remote PC. The analog quantities will be displayed as RMS values of the secondary
side of CT.
Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. The RMS value is calculate in each interval and the LCD
display will be updated in every 0.5 second.
Users can view the measured data on LCD by navigating the menu Measurements, or by
PCS-PC software or substation automatic system (SAS) software.
PCS-915 has two DSP module which are protection calculation module (DSP module 1) and fault
detector calculation module (DSP module 2) The sampling values of both modules can be
displayed on LCD through different access menu.

5.2.1 Analogue input quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 (Have been
converted to the referenced side)
Item

Rotation

Description

Id_CZ

A,B,C

Three-phase check zone differential currents

Id_BBx

A,B,C

Three-phase discriminating zone differential currents of BBx (x=1 or 2)

UP_BBx

A,B,C

Three phase voltages of BBx (x=1 or 2)

IP_Bayxx

A,B,C

Three phase currents of bay xx (xx=01~25)

Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsProt MeasurementsMeasured Values
MainMenuMeasurementsFD MeasurementsMeasured Values

5.2.2 Phase angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2


When voltage is sampled by the device and phase A voltage of BB1 is larger than a certain value,
the phase A voltage of BB1 will be taken as a reference. If the phase A voltage of BB1 is smaller
than the certain value and the phase A voltage of BB2 is larger than the certain value, the phase A
voltage of BB2 will be taken as a reference. If the phase A voltage of BB1 and BB2 are all smaller
than the certain value, phase A voltage of BB1 is taken as a reference.
When voltage is not sampled by the device, if the currents of some bay are larger than a certain
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

5-1
Date: 2013-06-03

5 Measurement and Recording

value, the phase A current of the bay (takes the bay whose number is minimal) will be taken as a
reference.
Item

Rotation

Description
If the phase A voltage of BB1 is taken as a reference, the displayed value
ofAngRef is 1, if phase A voltage of BB2 is taken as a reference, the
displayed value of AngRef is 2. If phase A voltage of BB1 and BB2
are all smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of AngRef is

AngRef

0.
If the phase A current of bay m is taken as a reference, the displayed
value of AngRef is m (m=01, 02, 03, ), if all the currents are
smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of AngRef is 0.

Ang(IP)_Bayxx

A,B,C

The phase angle of current of bay xx (xx=01~25)

Ang(UP)_BBx

A,B,C

The phase angle of voltage of BBx (x=1 or 2)

Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsProt MeasurementsPhase Angle
MainMenuMeasurementsFD MeasurementsPhase Angle

5.2.3 Debug values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2


The debug values are usually provided for commission person for reference.
Item

Rotation

Upp_BBx

AB, BC, CA

Description
Phase-to-phase voltage of BBx (x=1 or 2)

I2_Bayxx

Negative sequence current of bay xx (xx=01~25)

3I0_Bayxx

Residual current of bay xx (xx=01~25)

U2_BBx

Negative sequence voltage of BBx (x=1 or 2)

3U0_BBx

Residual voltage of BBx (x=1 or 2)

Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsProt MeasurementsCal Values
MainMenuMeasurementsFD MeasurementsCal Values

5.3 Event & fault Records


5.3.1 Introduction
PCS-915 is capable of providing event recording, fault and disturbance recording for the protected
objects. All the recorded information except for waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by
printing. Waveform must be printed or be extracted using PCS-PC software and a waveform
software.

5-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

5 Measurement and Recording

5.3.2 Event Recording


The equipment can store the latest 1024 abnormality alarm reports and the latest 1024 binary
input changing reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when
the available space is fully occupied, the oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest
one.

Abnormality alarm reports

Abnormality detected during relay self-supervision, secondary circuit abnormality or protection


alarm element will be logged as individual events.

Binary input status changing reports

When binary input status changes, the changed information will be displayed on LCD and logged
as binary input change report at the same time.

5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording


5.3.3.1 Application
Users can use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the
power network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
Analyzing the recorded data can help users to resolve practical problem.
5.3.3.2 Design
Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform and it is triggered by fault
detector. The equipment can store 32 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in non-volatile memory.
When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip
record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of
cases:
1)

Only the fault detector element operates.

2)

The fault detector element operates along with the operation of protective elements.

1.

Trip record capacity and information

The equipment can store 32 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs
when the spaces are fully occupied, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
A complete trip record includes the following items:
1)

Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.
2)

Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault
detector picks up. The relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

5-3
Date: 2013-06-03

5 Measurement and Recording

signal after fault detector picks up.


3)

Faulty phase

The faulty phase detected by the operating element is shown in the record report.
4)

Operating time

It is the relative time when protection element operates to send tripping signal relative to fault
detector element operating, the operating time of output relay is not included.
5)

Protection element

The protection element that issues the tripping command will be shown. If no protection element
operates to trip but only fault detector element operates, the fault report will record the title of fault
detector element.
6)

Tripping element

The elements (feeder or bus coupler) tripped are also shown


2.

Fault waveform record capacity and information

MON module of the relay can store 32 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory.
If a new fault occurs when 32 fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be
overwritten by the latest one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform before a fault detector pickup, and up to 250
cycles can be recorded.

5.3.4 Present Recording


Present recording is used to record the waveform of present operating equipment which can be
triggerred manually on LCD of equipment or remotely through PCS-PC software. Recording
content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform before triggering, and up to 250 cycles can be
recorded.

5-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

6 Hardware

6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6 Hardware ......................................................................................... 6-a
6.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition ............................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply) ................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor) ............................................................................................ 6-5
6.2.3 DSP Plug-in Module 1 (Protection Calculation) .................................................................. 6-8
6.2.4 DSP Plug-in Module 2 (Fault Detector) ............................................................................... 6-8
6.2.5 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input) ......................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.6 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output) ................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.7 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)....................................................................................... 6-22

List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Front view of PCS-915 ........................................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of PCS-915 ................................................................................ 6-3
Figure 6.2-1 View of PWR plug-in module ................................................................................ 6-4
Figure 6.2-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module............................................................. 6-4
Figure 6.2-3 View of MON plug-in module ................................................................................ 6-6
Figure 6.2-4 Connection of communication terminal .............................................................. 6-8
Figure 6.2-5 Pin definition of binary input module NR1502D ................................................. 6-9
Figure 6.2-6 Pin definition of binary input module NR1502AS............................................. 6-11
Figure 6.2-7 Pin definition of tripping output module NR1547 ................................................. 6-17
Figure 6.2-8 Pin definition of signal output module NR1548A ................................................. 6-21
Figure 6.2-9 Pin definition of the first AC analog input module ............................................... 6-22

Table of Tables
Table 6.2-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module .............................. 6-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-a
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

Table 6.2-2 Pin definition of B04 module ..................................................................................... 6-9


Table 6.2-3 Pin definition of B05 module ................................................................................... 6-11
Table 6.2-4 Pin definition of B06 module ................................................................................... 6-12
Table 6.2-5 Pin definition of B07 module ................................................................................... 6-13
Table 6.2-6 Pin definition of B08 module ................................................................................... 6-13
Table 6.2-7 Pin definition of B09 module ................................................................................... 6-14
Table 6.2-8 Pin definition of B10 module ................................................................................... 6-15
Table 6.2-9 Pin definition of B11 module ................................................................................... 6-16
Table 6.2-10 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 12 ..................................................... 6-17
Table 6.2-11 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 13 ..................................................... 6-18
Table 6.2-12 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 14 ..................................................... 6-18
Table 6.2-13 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 15 ..................................................... 6-19
Table 6.2-14 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 30 ..................................................... 6-19
Table 6.2-15 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 31 ..................................................... 6-20
Table 6.2-16 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 32 ..................................................... 6-21
Table 6.2-17 Pin definition of the first analog input module (slot 16,17) .................................. 6-23
Table 6.2-18 Pin definition of the second analog input module (slot 18,19) ............................ 6-23
Table 6.2-19 Pin definition of the third analog input module (slot 20,21) ................................ 6-24
Table 6.2-20 Pin definition of the fourth analog input module (slot 22,23) .............................. 6-24
Table 6.2-21 Pin definition of the fifth analog input module (slot 24,25) .................................. 6-25
Table 6.2-22 Pin definition of the sixth analog input module (slot 26,27) ................................ 6-26
Table 6.2-23 Pin definition of the seventh analog input module (slot 28,29) ........................... 6-26

6-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

6.1 General Description


PCS-915 adopts 32-bit micro-processor CPU for logic calculations and function management, The
protection calculations are processed by high-speed digital signal processor DSP. System
parameters are sampled at 24 points in every cycle. The sampling data are parallel processed in
each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of protection equipment.
PCS-915 captures current and voltage signal and converts to small signals. These small signals
will be filtered and converted to digital signals by AD converter before being sent to protection
calculation module (DSP module 1) and fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2). When
MON module completes all the protection calculations, the results will be stored in 32-bit CPU on
MON module. DSP module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON
module can provide SOE (sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing,
communication between protection and substation automatic system (SAS) and communication
between HMI and CPU. The operating procedures of fault detector calculation module are similar
to that of protection calculation module, and the only difference is, when fault detector calculation
module decides a fault detector picks up, only the positive power supply of output relay is switched
on.
Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration
No.

Module description

Management module (MON module)

Protection calculation module (DSP module 1)

Fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2)

Analog input module ( AI module )

DC analog input module (DC AI module)

Binary input module (BI module)

Tripping output module (BO trip module )

Signal output module (BO signal module )

Power supply module (PWR module)

10

Human machine interface module (HMI module)

MON module provides management function, completed event record, setting management,
and etc.

DSP modules can provide filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector
calculation.

AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals by current transformers
and voltage transformers respectively.

BI module provides binary inputs which are inputted via 24V/48V/110V/125V/220V/250V


opto-coupler (configurable).

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-1
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

BO trip module provides all tripping outputs.

BO signal module provides all kinds of signal output contacts, including annunciation signals,
remote signals, fault and disturbance signals, operation abnormal signals and etc.

PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V to different DC voltage levels on request for


various modules of the equipment.

HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and test serial ports.

The following figure shows front view of 8U size PCS-915.

PCS-915

HEALTHY

BUSBAR PROTECTION

MISC ALM

ENT
C

BBP TRIP
BFP TRIP
MISC TRIP

ES

DS ALM

GR
P

PT/CT ALM

Figure 6.1-1 Front view of PCS-915

The following figure shows typical rear view of 8U size PCS-915.

6-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Slot No.

01

02

03

NR1102D

NR1151D

04

NR1151D

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

NR1502D NR1502AS NR1502AS NR1502AS NR1502AS NR1502AS NR1502AS NR1502AS

12

13

14

15

NR1547

NR1547

NR1547

NR1547

P1
NR1301A
5V

BJ

BJJ BSJ

1
2

BO_COM1
BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

BO_COM2

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

OPTO+

OPTO-

NR1401

NR1401

DANGER

Slot No.

16

17

NR1401

DANGER

18

19

NR1401

DANGER

20

21

NR1401

DANGER

22

NR1401

DANGER

23

24

25

NR1401

DANGER

26

27

10

PWR+

11

PWR-

12

GND

NR1547

NR1547

NR1548A

30

31

32

DANGER

28

29

Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of PCS-915

6.2 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition


PCS-915 consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, Analog input module,
opto-coupler input module, tripping output module, and signal output module. The definition and
application of each module and its terminal is introduced as follows.

6.2.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply)


PWR module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and output. It
has an input voltage range as described in Chapter 2 Technical Data. The standardized output
voltages are +3.3V, +5V, 12V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the output voltages are
continuously monitored.
The +3.3V DC output provides power supply for the microchip processors, and the +5V DC output
provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power supply in this device.
The 12V DC output provides power supply for A/D conversion circuits in this device, and the
+24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-3
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

A 12-pin connector is fixed on PWR module. The terminal definition of the connector is described
as below.

NR1301
5V OK

ALM

BO_ALM BO_FAIL

ON
OFF

BO_COM1

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

BO_COM2

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

OPTO+

OPTO-

9
10 PWR+
11 PWR12 GND

Figure 6.2-1 View of PWR plug-in module

01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06

Figure 6.2-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module

Terminal definition and description is shown as follows:


Table 6.2-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module
Terminal No.

Symbol

Description

01

BO_COM1

Common terminal 1

02

BO_FAIL

Device failure output 1 (01-02, NC)

03

BO_ALM

Device abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)

04

BO_COM2

Common terminal 2

05

BO_FAIL

Device failure output 2 (04-05, NC)

6-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Terminal No.

Symbol

Description

06

BO_ALM

Device abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)

07

OPTO+

Positive power supply for BI module (24V)

08

OPTO-

Negative power supply for BI module (24V)

09

Blank

Not used

10

PWR+

Positive input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)

11

PWR-

Negative input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)

12

GND

Grounded connection of the power supply

Note!

The standard rated voltage of PWR module is self-adaptive to 88~300 Vdc. If input voltage
is out of range, an alarm signal (Fail_Device) will be issued. For non-standard rated
voltage power supply module please specify when ordering, and check if the rated voltage
of power supply module is the same as the voltage of power source before the device
being put into service.
PWR module provides terminal 12 and grounding screw for device grounding. Terminal 12
shall be connected to grounding screw and then connected to the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
Effective grounding is the most important measure for a device to prevent EMI, so effective
grounding must be ensured before the device is put into service.
PCS-915, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These
capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied
periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.

6.2.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor)


MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM, Ethernet
controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete device, human
machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module comprises 100BaseT Ethernet
interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces that exchange information with above system by
using IEC61850, PPS/IRIG-B differential time synchronization interface and RS-232 printing
interface.
Modules with various combinations of memory and interface are available as shown in the table
below.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-5
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

NR1102A

ETHERNET

NR1102B

ETHERNET

NR1102C

ETHERNET

NR1102D

NR1102H

NR1102I

TX

TX

RX

RX

TX

TX

ETHERNET

NR1101E

ETHERNET

RX

RX

ETHERNET

ETHERNET

Figure 6.2-3 View of MON plug-in module


Module ID

Memory

Interface

Terminal No.

2 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485
NR1102A

64M DDR

To SCADA
01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

4 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485
64M DDR

Twisted pair wire

To printer

Cable

To SCADA
01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

2 RJ45 Ethernet

128M DDR

clock

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

RS-232

NR1102C

Physical Layer

04

RS-232

NR1102B

Usage

RS-485

To printer

Cable

To SCADA
01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

6-6

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

RS-232

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

4 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485
NR1102D

128M DDR

128M DDR

Cable

To SCADA
01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

RS-232

NR1102H

To printer

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

To printer

Cable

2 RJ45 Ethernet

To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet

To SCADA

Optical fibre SC

RS-485

01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

RS-232

NR1102I

128M DDR

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

To printer

Cable

2 RJ45 Ethernet

To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet

To SCADA

Optical fibre ST

RS-485

01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

RS-232

05

RXD

06

TXD

07

SGND

2 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485

To printer

Cable

To SCADA
01

02

03

SGND

To SCADA

04

NR1101E

128M DDR

RS-485

05

06

07

SGND

Twisted pair wire

To SCADA

08

RS-485

09

SYN+

10

SYN-

To

11

SGND

synchronization

RTS

To printer

clock

12
RS-232

13

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

Cable

6-7
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
14

TXD

15

SGND

16

The correct connection is shown in Figure 6.2-4. Generally, the shielded cable with two pairs of
twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to connect
the + and terminals of difference signal. The other pair of twisted pairs are used to connect
the signal ground of the communication interface. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports. The free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device, and it is
used to connect the external shields of the cable when connecting multiple devices in series. The
external shield of the cable shall be grounded at one of the ends only.
Twisted pair wire
01

02

SGND

03

COM

04

Twisted pair wire


SYN+

01

SYN-

02

SGND

03

Clock SYN

To the screen of other coaxial


cable with single point earthing

04

Cable
05

TXD

06

SGND

07

PRINT

RTS

Figure 6.2-4 Connection of communication terminal

6.2.3 DSP Plug-in Module 1 (Protection Calculation)


The DSP Module 1 consists of high-performance digital signal processor, 16-digit high-accuracy
ADC for synchronous sampling, and other peripherals. The functions of this module include
analog data acquisition, calculation of protection logic and tripping output etc.

6.2.4 DSP Plug-in Module 2 (Fault Detector)


The DSP Module 2 consists of high-performance digital signal processor, 16-digit high-accuracy
ADC for synchronous sampling, and other peripherals. The functions of this module include
analog data acquisition, calculation of fault detector elements and providing positive power supply
to output relay.
DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 have the same hardware configuration.

6.2.5 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input)


6.2.5.1 Binary Input Module (Slot B04: NR1502D)
25 low voltage binary inputs are equipped with the NR1502D module and it has opto-coupler
power monitor circuit.

6-8

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

10

11

12

13
15

16

24/48V-

24/48V+

14
18

17

20

19

22

21

24

23

26

25

28

27

30

29

Figure 6.2-5 Pin definition of binary input module NR1502D

Table 6.2-2 Pin definition of B04 module


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_Pulse_GPS

Binary input of time synchronization pulse

02

BI_Print

Binary input of triggering printing

03

BI_Maintenance

04

BI_RstTarg

Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.

05

BI_ConfirmDS

Confirming disconnector position

06

Blank

Blank

07

EBI_BBP

Binary input for enabling BBP

08

EBI_BFP

Binary input for enabling BFP

09

EBI_SOTF_BC

Enable isolator link for enabling BC SOTF protection

10

EBI_OC_BC

Enable isolator link for enabling BC OC protection

11

EBI_PD_BC

Enable isolator link for enabling BC PD protection

12

Reserved

Reserved

Binary input of blocking communication between equipment and


substation automatic system (SAS) or remote terminal unit (RTU).

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-9
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

13

Blank

Blank

14

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply for low voltage opto-couplers (DC 24/48V)

15

Opto-

Negative pole of power supply for low voltage opto-couplers (DC 24/48V)

16

Blank

Blank

17

Reserved

Reserved

18

Reserved

Reserved

19

Reserved

Reserved

20

Reserved

Reserved

21

Reserved

Reserved

22

EBI_IntLink_Mode

23

Reserved

Reserved

24

Reserved

Reserved

25

EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT

26

Reserved

27

EBI_BT_BC

28

Reserved

Reserved

29

Reserved

Reserved

Binary input to confirm BB1 and BB2 are under inter-connected operation
mode

Reverse the polarity mark of BC CT when BC breaker is used to substitute


one of feeder breakers
Reserved
Binary input indicating BC breaker is used to substitute one of feeder
breakers

6.2.5.2 Binary Input Module (Slot B05~B11: NR1502AS)


25 high voltage binary inputs are equipped with the NR1502AS module and it has opto-coupler
power monitor circuit.

6-10

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

10

11

12

13

110/220V+

14

15

110/220V-

16
18

17

20

19

22

21

24

23

26

25

28

27

30

29

Figure 6.2-6 Pin definition of binary input module NR1502AS

Table 6.2-3 Pin definition of B05 module


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_52b_BC

Normally closed auxiliary contact of BC

02

Reserved

Reserved

03

BI_52a_BC

Normally open auxiliary contact of BC

04

BI_PD_BC

Binary input indicating BC breaker is in pole disagreement status

05

Reserved

Reserved

06

Reserved

Reserved

07

Reserved

Reserved

08

Reserved

Reserved

09

Reserved

Reserved

10

Reserved

Reserved

11

Reserved

Reserved

12

Reserved

Reserved

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-11
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

14

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

15

Opto-

Negative pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

17

BI_Blk_BBP

External blocking busbar differential protection binary input

18

BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans

19

Reserved

20

EBI_Decoupled_BC

21

Reserved

Reserved

22

Reserved

Reserved

23

Reserved

Reserved

24

Reserved

Reserved

25

BI_52a_DSBB1_BT

Normally open auxiliary contact of substituting disconnector of BB1

26

BI_52a_DSBB2_BT

Normally open auxiliary contact of substituting disconnector of BB2

27

Reserved

Reserved

28

Reserved

Reserved

29

Reserved

Reserved

The binary input for releasing voltage blocking element for main
transformer bays
Reserved
Binary input to confirm BB1 and BB2 are separated as two
independent busbars

Table 6.2-4 Pin definition of B06 module


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_BFI_Bay02

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 02

02

BI_BFI_Bay03

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 03

03

BI_BFI_Bay14

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 14

04

BI_BFI_Bay15

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 15

05

BI_A_BFI_Bay04

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 04

06

BI_B_BFI_Bay04

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay04

07

BI_C_BFI_Bay04

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 04

08

BI_BFI_Bay04

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 04

09

BI_A_BFI_Bay05

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 05

10

BI_B_BFI_Bay05

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay05

11

BI_C_BFI_Bay05

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 05

12

BI_BFI_Bay05

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 05

14

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

15

Opto-

Negative pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

17

BI_A_BFI_Bay06

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 06

18

BI_B_BFI_Bay06

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay06

19

BI_C_BFI_Bay06

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 06

20

BI_BFI_Bay06

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 06

21

BI_A_BFI_Bay07

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 07

22

BI_B_BFI_Bay07

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay07

23

BI_C_BFI_Bay07

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 07

6-12

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

24

BI_BFI_Bay07

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 07

25

BI_A_BFI_Bay08

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 08

26

BI_B_BFI_Bay08

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay08

27

BI_C_BFI_Bay08

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 08

28

BI_BFI_Bay08

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 08

29

Reserved

Reserved

Table 6.2-5 Pin definition of B07 module


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_A_BFI_Bay09

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 09

02

BI_B_BFI_Bay09

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay09

03

BI_C_BFI_Bay09

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 09

04

BI_BFI_Bay09

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 09

05

BI_A_BFI_Bay10

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 10

06

BI_B_BFI_Bay10

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay10

07

BI_C_BFI_Bay10

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 10

08

BI_BFI_Bay10

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 10

09

BI_A_BFI_Bay11

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 11

10

BI_B_BFI_Bay11

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay11

11

BI_C_BFI_Bay11

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 11

12

BI_BFI_Bay11

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 11

14

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

15

Opto-

Negative pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

17

BI_A_BFI_Bay12

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 12

18

BI_B_BFI_Bay12

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay12

19

BI_C_BFI_Bay12

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 12

20

BI_BFI_Bay12

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 12

21

BI_A_BFI_Bay13

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 13

22

BI_B_BFI_Bay13

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay13

23

BI_C_BFI_Bay13

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 13

24

BI_BFI_Bay13

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 13

25

BI_A_BFI_Bay16

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 16

26

BI_B_BFI_Bay16

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay16

27

BI_C_BFI_Bay16

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 16

28

BI_BFI_Bay16

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 16

29

Reserved

Reserved

Table 6.2-6 Pin definition of B08 module


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_A_BFI_Bay17

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 17

02

BI_B_BFI_Bay17

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay17

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-13
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

03

BI_C_BFI_Bay17

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 17

04

BI_BFI_Bay17

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 17

05

BI_A_BFI_Bay18

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 18

06

BI_B_BFI_Bay18

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay18

07

BI_C_BFI_Bay18

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 18

08

BI_BFI_Bay18

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 18

09

BI_A_BFI_Bay19

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 19

10

BI_B_BFI_Bay19

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay19

11

BI_C_BFI_Bay19

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 19

12

BI_BFI_Bay19

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 19

14

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

15

Opto-

Negative pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

17

BI_A_BFI_Bay20

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 20

18

BI_B_BFI_Bay20

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay20

19

BI_C_BFI_Bay20

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 20

20

BI_BFI_Bay20

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 20

21

BI_A_BFI_Bay21

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 21

22

BI_B_BFI_Bay21

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay21

23

BI_C_BFI_Bay21

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 21

24

BI_BFI_Bay21

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 21

25

BI_A_BFI_Bay22

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 22

26

BI_B_BFI_Bay22

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay22

27

BI_C_BFI_Bay22

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 22

28

BI_BFI_Bay22

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 22

29

Reserved

Reserved

Table 6.2-7 Pin definition of B09 module


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_A_BFI_Bay23

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 23

02

BI_B_BFI_Bay23

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay23

03

BI_C_BFI_Bay23

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 23

04

BI_BFI_Bay23

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 23

05

BI_A_BFI_Bay24

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 24

06

BI_B_BFI_Bay24

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay24

07

BI_C_BFI_Bay24

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 24

08

BI_BFI_Bay24

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 24

09

BI_A_BFI_Bay25

Phase A initiating contact of BFP for bay 25

10

BI_B_BFI_Bay25

Phase B initiating contact of BFP for bay25

11

BI_C_BFI_Bay25

Phase C initiating contact of BFP for bay 25

12

BI_BFI_Bay25

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for bay 25

14

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

6-14

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

15

Opto-

Negative pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

17

BI_A_BFI_BT

18

BI_B_BFI_BT

19

BI_C_BFI_BT

20

BI_BFI_BT

21

Reserved

Reserved

22

Reserved

Reserved

23

Reserved

Reserved

24

Reserved

Reserved

25

BI_BFI_BC_1

Three-phase initiating contact of BFP for BC

26

Reserved

Reserved

27

Reserved

Reserved

28

Reserved

Reserved

29

Reserved

Reserved

Phase A initiating contact of BFP when BC is substituted a feeder


breaker
Phase B initiating contact of BFP when BC is substituted a feeder
breaker
Phase C initiating contact of BFP when BC is substituted a feeder
breaker
Three-phase initiating contact of BFP when BC is substituted a feeder
breaker

Table 6.2-8 Pin definition of B10 module


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay02

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 02

02

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay02

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 02

03

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay03

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 03

04

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay03

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 03

05

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay04

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 04

06

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay04

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 04

07

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay05

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 05

08

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay05

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 05

09

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay06

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 06

10

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay06

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 06

11

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay07

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 07

12

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay07

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 07

14

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

15

Opto-

Negative pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

17

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay08

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 08

18

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay08

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 08

19

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay09

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 09

20

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay09

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 09

21

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay10

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 10

22

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay10

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 10

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-15
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

23

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay11

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 11

24

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay11

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 11

25

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay12

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 12

26

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay12

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 12

27

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay13

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 13

28

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay13

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 13

29

Reserved

Reserved

Table 6.2-9 Pin definition of B11 module


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay14

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 14

02

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay14

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 14

03

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay15

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 15

04

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay15

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 15

05

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay16

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 16

06

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay16

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 16

07

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay17

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 17

08

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay17

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 17

09

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay18

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 18

10

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay18

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 18

11

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay19

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 19

12

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay19

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 19

14

Opto+

Positive pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

15

Opto-

Negative pole of power supply for opto-couplers (DC 220/110V)

17

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay20

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 20

18

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay20

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 20

19

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay21

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 21

20

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay21

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 21

21

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay22

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 22

22

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay22

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 22

23

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay23

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 23

24

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay23

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 23

25

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay24

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 24

26

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay24

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 24

27

BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay25

Normally open contact of BB1 disconnector of bay 25

28

BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay25

Normally open contact of BB2 disconnector of bay 25

29

Reserved

Reserved

6.2.6 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output)


6.2.6.1 Tripping Output Module (Slot 12~15, 30, 31: NR1547)
NR1547 module is standard binary output module, each module can provide 15 normally open
6-16

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

(NO) tripping output contacts and all the output contacts provided by NR1547 will be controlled by
positive power supply of fault detector.
A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
NR1547
BO_Trp_1

01

BO_Trp_1

02

BO_Trp_2

03

BO_Trp_2

04

BO_Trp_3

05

BO_Trp_3

06

BO_Trp_4

07

BO_Trp_4

08

BO_Trp_5

09

BO_Trp_5

10

BO_Trp_6

11

BO_Trp_6

12

BO_Trp_7

13

BO_Trp_7

14

BO_Trp_8

15

BO_Trp_8

16

BO_Trp_9

17

BO_Trp_9

18

BO_Trp_10

19

BO_Trp_10

20

BO_Trp_11

21

BO_Trp_11

22

BO_Trp_12

23

BO_Trp_12

24

BO_Trp_13

25

BO_Trp_13

26

BO_Trp_14

27

BO_Trp_14

28

BO_Trp_15

29

BO_Trp_15

30

BO_Trp_1
BO_Trp_2
BO_Trp_3
BO_Trp_4
BO_Trp_5
BO_Trp_6
BO_Trp_7
BO_Trp_8
BO_Trp_9
BO_Trp_10
BO_Trp_11
BO_Trp_12
BO_Trp_13
BO_Trp_14
BO_Trp_15

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Figure 6.2-7 Pin definition of tripping output module NR1547

Table 6.2-10 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 12


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01~02

BO_TrpBay01_1

Tripping contact of bay 01 (first)

03~04

BO_TrpBay01_2

Tripping contact of bay 01 (second)

05~06

BO_TrpBay02_1

Tripping contact of bay 02 (first)

07~08

BO_TrpBay02_2

Tripping contact of bay 02 (second)

09~10

BO_TrpBay03_1

Tripping contact of bay 03 (first)

11~12

BO_TrpBay03_2

Tripping contact of bay 03 (second)

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-17
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

13~14

BO_TrpBay04_1

Tripping contact of bay 04 (first)

15~16

BO_TrpBay04_2

Tripping contact of bay 04 (second)

17~18

BO_TrpBay05_1

Tripping contact of bay 05 (first)

19~20

BO_TrpBay05_2

Tripping contact of bay 05 (second)

21~22

BO_TrpBay06_1

Tripping contact of bay 06 (first)

23~24

BO_TrpBay06_2

Tripping contact of bay 06 (second)

25~26

BO_TrpBay07_1

Tripping contact of bay 07 (first)

27~28

BO_TrpBay07_2

Tripping contact of bay 07 (second)

29~30

BO_TrpBay08_1

Tripping contact of bay 08 (first)

Table 6.2-11 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 13


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01~02

BO_TrpBay08_2

Tripping contact of bay 08 (second)

03~04

BO_TrpBay09_1

Tripping contact of bay 09 (first)

05~06

BO_TrpBay09_2

Tripping contact of bay 09 (second)

07~08

BO_TrpBay10_1

Tripping contact of bay 10 (first)

09~10

BO_TrpBay10_2

Tripping contact of bay 10 (second)

11~12

BO_TrpBay11_1

Tripping contact of bay 11 (first)

13~14

BO_TrpBay11_2

Tripping contact of bay 11 (second)

15~16

BO_TrpBay12_1

Tripping contact of bay 12 (first)

17~18

BO_TrpBay12_2

Tripping contact of bay 12 (second)

19~20

BO_TrpBay13_1

Tripping contact of bay 13 (first)

21~22

BO_TrpBay13_2

Tripping contact of bay 13 (second)

23~24

BO_TrpBay14_1

Tripping contact of bay 14 (first)

25~26

BO_TrpBay14_2

Tripping contact of bay 14 (second)

27~28

BO_TrpBay15_1

Tripping contact of bay 15 (first)

29~30

BO_TrpBay15_2

Tripping contact of bay 15 (second)

Table 6.2-12 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 14


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01~02

BO_TrpBay16_1

Tripping contact of bay 16 (first)

03~04

BO_TrpBay16_2

Tripping contact of bay 16 (second)

05~06

BO_TrpBay17_1

Tripping contact of bay 17 (first)

07~08

BO_TrpBay17_2

Tripping contact of bay 17 (second)

09~10

BO_TrpBay18_1

Tripping contact of bay 18 (first)

11~12

BO_TrpBay18_2

Tripping contact of bay 18 (second)

13~14

BO_TrpBay19_1

Tripping contact of bay 19 (first)

15~16

BO_TrpBay19_2

Tripping contact of bay 19 (second)

17~18

BO_TrpBay20_1

Tripping contact of bay 20 (first)

6-18

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

19~20

BO_TrpBay20_2

Tripping contact of bay 20 (second)

21~22

BO_TrpBay21_1

Tripping contact of bay 21 (first)

23~24

BO_TrpBay21_2

Tripping contact of bay 21 (second)

25~26

BO_TrpBay22_1

Tripping contact of bay 22 (first)

27~28

BO_TrpBay22_2

Tripping contact of bay 22 (second)

29~30

BO_TrpBay23_1

Tripping contact of bay 23 (first)

Table 6.2-13 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 15


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01~02

BO_TrpBay23_2

Tripping contact of bay 23 (second)

03~04

BO_TrpBay24_1

Tripping contact of bay 24 (first)

05~06

BO_TrpBay24_2

Tripping contact of bay 24 (second)

07~08

BO_TrpBay25_1

Tripping contact of bay 25 (first)

09~10

BO_TrpBay25_2

Tripping contact of bay 25 (second)

11~12

BO_IntTrp_BFP_Bay02

13~14

BO_IntTrp_BFP_Bay03

15~16

BO_IntTrp_BFP_Bay14

17~18

BO_IntTrp_BFP_Bay15

19~20

BO_BBP_TrpBay02

Tripping contact of bay 02 (for BBP)

21~22

BO_BBP_TrpBay03

Tripping contact of bay 03 (for BBP)

23~24

BO_BBP_TrpBay14

Tripping contact of bay 14 (for BBP)

25~26

BO_BBP_TrpBay15

Tripping contact of bay 15 (for BBP)

27~28

Reserved

Reserved

29~30

Reserved

Reserved

Intertripping breakers of other sides of main transformer if circuit


breaker of any side fails (for bay 02)
Intertripping breakers of other sides of main transformer if circuit
breaker of any side fails (for bay 03)
Intertripping breakers of other sides of main transformer if circuit
breaker of any side fails (for bay 14)
Intertripping breakers of other sides of main transformer if circuit
breaker of any side fails (for bay 15)

Table 6.2-14 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 30


Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01~02

BO_TrpBB1_1

Trip busbar No.1 (first)

03~04

BO_TrpBB1_2

Trip busbar No.1 (second)

05~06

BO_TrpBB2_1

Trip busbar No.2 (first)

07~08

BO_TrpBB2_2

Trip busbar No.2 (second)

09~10

Reserved

Reserved

11~12

Reserved

Reserved

13~14

Reserved

Reserved

15~16

Reserved

Reserved

17~18

Reserved

Reserved

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-19
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

19~20

Reserved

Reserved

21~22

Reserved

Reserved

23~24

Reserved

Reserved

25~26

Reserved

Reserved

27~28

Reserved

Reserved

29~30

Reserved

Reserved

Table 6.2-15 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 31


Pin No.

Symbol

Description
Busbar differential protection operates to trip busbar No.1

01~02

BO_TrpBB1_BBP_1

03~04

BO_TrpBB1_BBP_2

05~06

BO_TrpBB2_BBP_1

07~08

BO_TrpBB2_BBP_2

09~10

Reserved

Reserved

11~12

Reserved

Reserved

13~14

BO_TrpBB1_BFP_1

15~16

BO_TrpBB1_BFP_2

17~18

BO_TrpBB2_BFP_1

19~20

BO_TrpBB2_BFP_2

21~22

Reserved

Reserved

23~24

Reserved

Reserved

25~26

BO_TrpBC/BS_1

27~28

BO_TrpBC/BS_2

29~30

Reserved

(first)
Busbar differential protection operates to trip busbar No.1
(second)
Busbar differential protection operates to trip busbar No.2
(first)
Busbar differential protection operates to trip busbar No.2
(second)

Breaker failure protection operates to trip busbar No.1


(first)
Breaker failure protection operates to trip busbar No.1
(second)
Breaker failure protection operates to trip busbar No.2
(first)
Breaker failure protection operates to trip busbar No.2
(second)

BC/BS protection operates or other protective element


operates to trip BC/BS (first)
BC/BS protection operates or other protective element
operates to trip BC/BS (second)
Reserved

6.2.6.2 Signal Output Module (Slot 32: NR1548A)


The NR1548A module is a standard binary output module for signal, which can provide 15 signal
output contacts and all the contacts are normally open (NO) contacts. Only the last seven contacts
([BO_Signal_9] ~ [BO_Signal_15]) are magnetic latched NO contacts defined as protection
tripping signal fixedly. [BO_Signal_1] ~ [BO_Signal_8] will not be controlled by positive power
supply of fault detector and [BO_Signal_9] ~ [BO_Signal_15] will be controlled by positive power
6-20

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

supply of fault detector.


A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
NR1548A
BO_Signal_1

01

BO_Signal_1

02

BO_Signal_2

03

BO_Signal_2

04

BO_Signal_3

05

BO_Signal_3

06

BO_Signal_4

07

BO_Signal_4

08

BO_Signal_5

09

BO_Signal_5

10

BO_Signal_6

11

BO_Signal_6

12

BO_Signal_7

13

BO_Signal_7

14

BO_Signal_8

15

BO_Signal_8

16

BO_Signal_9

17

BO_Signal_9

18

BO_Signal_10

19

BO_Signal_10

20

BO_Signal_11

21

BO_Signal_11

22

BO_Signal_12

23

BO_Signal_12

24

BO_Signal_13

25

BO_Signal_13

26

BO_Signal_14

27

BO_Signal_14

28

BO_Signal_15

29

BO_Signal_15

30

BO_Signal_1
BO_Signal_2
BO_Signal_3
BO_Signal_4
BO_Signal_5
BO_Signal_6
BO_Signal_7
BO_Signal_8
BO_Signal_9
BO_Signal_10
BO_Signal_11
BO_Signal_12
BO_Signal_13
BO_Signal_14
BO_Signal_15

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Figure 6.2-8 Pin definition of signal output module NR1548A


Table 6.2-16 Pin definition of BO module located in slot 32
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01~02

BO_VT/CT_Alm_1

VT/CT circuit failure alarm (first)

03~04

BO_VT/CT_Alm_2

VT/CT circuit failure alarm (second)

05~06

BO_DS_Alm_1

Disconnector position alarm (first)

07~08

BO_DS_Alm_2

Disconnector position alarm (second)

09~10

BO_IntLink_Alm_1

11~12

BO_IntLink_Alm_2

13~14

Reserved

Both disconnectors of any feeder for two busbars are closed at


the same time (first)
Both disconnectors of any feeder for two busbars are closed at
the same time (second)
Reserved

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-21
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

15~16

Reserved

17~18

BO_TrpBB1_BBP

19~20

BO_TrpBB2_BBP

21~22

Reserved

23~24

BO_TrpBB1_BFP

25~26

BO_TrpBB2_BFP

27~28

Reserved

29~30

BO_TrpBC/BS

Description
Reserved
Busbar differential protection operates to trip busbar No.1
(magnetic latched contact)
Busbar differential protection operates to trip busbar No.2
(magnetic latched contact)
Reserved
Breaker failure protection operates to trip busbar No.1 (magnetic
latched contact)
Breaker failure protection operates to trip busbar No.2 (magnetic
latched contact)
Reserved
BC/BS protection operates or other protective element operates
to trip BC/BS (magnetic latched contact)

6.2.7 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)


NR1401 can provide 12-channel analog signal inputs. A 24-pin connector is fixed on the front of
this module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below (Takes the first AC analog
input module as an example).
NR1401

Ia_Bay01

01

Ib_Bay01

03

Ibn_Bay01

04

Ic_Bay01

05

Icn_Bay01

06

Ia_Bay02

07

Ian_Bay02

08

Ib_Bay02

09

Ibn_Bay02

10

Ic_Bay02

11

Icn_Bay02

12

Ia_Bay03

13

Ian_Bay03

14

Ib_Bay03

15

Ibn_Bay03

16

Ic_Bay03

17

Icn_Bay03

18

Ia_Bay04

19

Ian_Bay04

20

Ib_Bay04

21

Ibn_Bay04

22

Ic_Bay04

23

Icn_Bay04

24

Ian_Bay01

02

Figure 6.2-9 Pin definition of the first AC analog input module

6-22

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Table 6.2-17 Pin definition of the first analog input module (slot 16,17)
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

Ia_Bay01

Phase A current from CT of bay 01 (polarity mark)

02

Ian_Bay01

Phase A current from CT of bay 01

03

Ib_Bay01

Phase B current from CT of bay 01 (polarity mark)

04

Ibn_Bay01

Phase B current from CT of bay 01

05

Ic_Bay01

Phase C current from CT of bay 01 (polarity mark)

06

Icn_Bay01

Phase C current from CT of bay 01

07

Ia_Bay02

Phase A current from CT of bay 02 (polarity mark)

08

Ian_Bay02

Phase A current from CT of bay 02

09

Ib_Bay02

Phase B current from CT of bay 02 (polarity mark)

10

Ibn_Bay02

Phase B current from CT of bay 02

11

Ic_Bay02

Phase C current from CT of bay 02 (polarity mark)

12

Icn_Bay02

Phase C current from CT of bay 02

13

Ia_Bay03

Phase A current from CT of bay 03 (polarity mark)

14

Ian_Bay03

Phase A current from CT of bay 03

15

Ib_Bay03

Phase B current from CT of bay 03 (polarity mark)

16

Ibn_Bay03

Phase B current from CT of bay 03

17

Ic_Bay03

Phase C current from CT of bay 03 (polarity mark)

18

Icn_Bay03

Phase C current from CT of bay 03

19

Ia_Bay04

Phase A current from CT of bay 04 (polarity mark)

20

Ian_Bay04

Phase A current from CT of bay 04

21

Ib_Bay04

Phase B current from CT of bay 04 (polarity mark)

22

Ibn_Bay04

Phase B current from CT of bay 04

23

Ic_Bay04

Phase C current from CT of bay 04 (polarity mark)

24

Icn_Bay04

Phase C current from CT of bay 04

Table 6.2-18 Pin definition of the second analog input module (slot 18,19)
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

Ia_Bay05

Phase A current from CT of bay 05 (polarity mark)

02

Ian_Bay05

Phase A current from CT of bay 05

03

Ib_Bay05

Phase B current from CT of bay 05 (polarity mark)

04

Ibn_Bay05

Phase B current from CT of bay 05

05

Ic_Bay05

Phase C current from CT of bay 05 (polarity mark)

06

Icn_Bay05

Phase C current from CT of bay 05

07

Ia_Bay06

Phase A current from CT of bay 06 (polarity mark)

08

Ian_Bay06

Phase A current from CT of bay 06

09

Ib_Bay06

Phase B current from CT of bay 06 (polarity mark)

10

Ibn_Bay06

Phase B current from CT of bay 06

11

Ic_Bay06

Phase C current from CT of bay 06 (polarity mark)

12

Icn_Bay06

Phase C current from CT of bay 06

13

Ia_Bay07

Phase A current from CT of bay 07 (polarity mark)

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-23
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

14

Ian_Bay07

Phase A current from CT of bay 07

15

Ib_Bay07

Phase B current from CT of bay 07 (polarity mark)

16

Ibn_Bay07

Phase B current from CT of bay 07

17

Ic_Bay07

Phase C current from CT of bay 07 (polarity mark)

18

Icn_Bay07

Phase C current from CT of bay 07

19

Ia_Bay08

Phase A current from CT of bay 08 (polarity mark)

20

Ian_Bay08

Phase A current from CT of bay 08

21

Ib_Bay08

Phase B current from CT of bay 08 (polarity mark)

22

Ibn_Bay08

Phase B current from CT of bay 08

23

Ic_Bay08

Phase C current from CT of bay 08 (polarity mark)

24

Icn_Bay08

Phase C current from CT of bay 08

Table 6.2-19 Pin definition of the third analog input module (slot 20,21)
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

Ia_Bay09

Phase A current from CT of bay 09 (polarity mark)

02

Ian_Bay09

Phase A current from CT of bay 09

03

Ib_Bay09

Phase B current from CT of bay 09 (polarity mark)

04

Ibn_Bay09

Phase B current from CT of bay 09

05

Ic_Bay09

Phase C current from CT of bay 09 (polarity mark)

06

Icn_Bay09

Phase C current from CT of bay 09

07

Ia_Bay10

Phase A current from CT of bay 10 (polarity mark)

08

Ian_Bay10

Phase A current from CT of bay 10

09

Ib_Bay10

Phase B current from CT of bay 10 (polarity mark)

10

Ibn_Bay10

Phase B current from CT of bay 10

11

Ic_Bay10

Phase C current from CT of bay 10 (polarity mark)

12

Icn_Bay10

Phase C current from CT of bay 10

13

Ia_Bay11

Phase A current from CT of bay 11 (polarity mark)

14

Ian_Bay11

Phase A current from CT of bay 11

15

Ib_Bay11

Phase B current from CT of bay 11 (polarity mark)

16

Ibn_Bay11

Phase B current from CT of bay 11

17

Ic_Bay11

Phase C current from CT of bay 11 (polarity mark)

18

Icn_Bay11

Phase C current from CT of bay 11

19

Ia_Bay12

Phase A current from CT of bay 12 (polarity mark)

20

Ian_Bay12

Phase A current from CT of bay 12

21

Ib_Bay12

Phase B current from CT of bay 12 (polarity mark)

22

Ibn_Bay12

Phase B current from CT of bay 12

23

Ic_Bay12

Phase C current from CT of bay 12 (polarity mark)

24

Icn_Bay12

Phase C current from CT of bay 12

Table 6.2-20 Pin definition of the fourth analog input module (slot 22,23)
Pin No.
01

Symbol
Ia_Bay13

Description
Phase A current from CT of bay 13 (polarity mark)

6-24

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

02

Ian_Bay13

Phase A current from CT of bay 13

03

Ib_Bay13

Phase B current from CT of bay 13 (polarity mark)

04

Ibn_Bay13

Phase B current from CT of bay 13

05

Ic_Bay13

Phase C current from CT of bay 13 (polarity mark)

06

Icn_Bay13

Phase C current from CT of bay 13

07

Ia_Bay14

Phase A current from CT of bay 14 (polarity mark)

08

Ian_Bay14

Phase A current from CT of bay 14

09

Ib_Bay14

Phase B current from CT of bay 14 (polarity mark)

10

Ibn_Bay14

Phase B current from CT of bay 14

11

Ic_Bay14

Phase C current from CT of bay 14 (polarity mark)

12

Icn_Bay14

Phase C current from CT of bay 14

13

Ia_Bay15

Phase A current from CT of bay 15 (polarity mark)

14

Ian_Bay15

Phase A current from CT of bay 15

15

Ib_Bay15

Phase B current from CT of bay 15 (polarity mark)

16

Ibn_Bay15

Phase B current from CT of bay 15

17

Ic_Bay15

Phase C current from CT of bay 15 (polarity mark)

18

Icn_Bay15

Phase C current from CT of bay 15

19

Ia_Bay16

Phase A current from CT of bay 16 (polarity mark)

20

Ian_Bay16

Phase A current from CT of bay 16

21

Ib_Bay16

Phase B current from CT of bay 16 (polarity mark)

22

Ibn_Bay16

Phase B current from CT of bay 16

23

Ic_Bay16

Phase C current from CT of bay 16 (polarity mark)

24

Icn_Bay16

Phase C current from CT of bay 16

Table 6.2-21 Pin definition of the fifth analog input module (slot 24,25)
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

Ia_Bay17

Phase A current from CT of bay 17 (polarity mark)

02

Ian_Bay17

Phase A current from CT of bay 17

03

Ib_Bay17

Phase B current from CT of bay 17 (polarity mark)

04

Ibn_Bay17

Phase B current from CT of bay 17

05

Ic_Bay17

Phase C current from CT of bay 17 (polarity mark)

06

Icn_Bay17

Phase C current from CT of bay 17

07

Ia_Bay18

Phase A current from CT of bay 18 (polarity mark)

08

Ian_Bay18

Phase A current from CT of bay 18

09

Ib_Bay18

Phase B current from CT of bay 18 (polarity mark)

10

Ibn_Bay18

Phase B current from CT of bay 18

11

Ic_Bay18

Phase C current from CT of bay 18 (polarity mark)

12

Icn_Bay18

Phase C current from CT of bay 18

13

Ia_Bay19

Phase A current from CT of bay 19 (polarity mark)

14

Ian_Bay19

Phase A current from CT of bay 19

15

Ib_Bay19

Phase B current from CT of bay 19 (polarity mark)

16

Ibn_Bay19

Phase B current from CT of bay 19

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-25
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

17

Ic_Bay19

Phase C current from CT of bay 19 (polarity mark)

18

Icn_Bay19

Phase C current from CT of bay 19

19

Ia_Bay20

Phase A current from CT of bay 20 (polarity mark)

20

Ian_Bay20

Phase A current from CT of bay 20

21

Ib_Bay20

Phase B current from CT of bay 20 (polarity mark)

22

Ibn_Bay20

Phase B current from CT of bay 20

23

Ic_Bay20

Phase C current from CT of bay 20 (polarity mark)

24

Icn_Bay20

Phase C current from CT of bay 20

Table 6.2-22 Pin definition of the sixth analog input module (slot 26,27)
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

Ia_Bay21

Phase A current from CT of bay 21 (polarity mark)

02

Ian_Bay21

Phase A current from CT of bay 21

03

Ib_Bay21

Phase B current from CT of bay 21 (polarity mark)

04

Ibn_Bay21

Phase B current from CT of bay 21

05

Ic_Bay21

Phase C current from CT of bay 21 (polarity mark)

06

Icn_Bay21

Phase C current from CT of bay 21

07

Ia_Bay22

Phase A current from CT of bay 22 (polarity mark)

08

Ian_Bay22

Phase A current from CT of bay 22

09

Ib_Bay22

Phase B current from CT of bay 22 (polarity mark)

10

Ibn_Bay22

Phase B current from CT of bay 22

11

Ic_Bay22

Phase C current from CT of bay 22 (polarity mark)

12

Icn_Bay22

Phase C current from CT of bay 22

13

Ia_Bay23

Phase A current from CT of bay 23 (polarity mark)

14

Ian_Bay23

Phase A current from CT of bay 23

15

Ib_Bay23

Phase B current from CT of bay 23 (polarity mark)

16

Ibn_Bay23

Phase B current from CT of bay 23

17

Ic_Bay23

Phase C current from CT of bay 23 (polarity mark)

18

Icn_Bay23

Phase C current from CT of bay 23

19

Ia_Bay24

Phase A current from CT of bay 24 (polarity mark)

20

Ian_Bay24

Phase A current from CT of bay 24

21

Ib_Bay24

Phase B current from CT of bay 24 (polarity mark)

22

Ibn_Bay24

Phase B current from CT of bay 24

23

Ic_Bay24

Phase C current from CT of bay 24 (polarity mark)

24

Icn_Bay24

Phase C current from CT of bay 24

Table 6.2-23 Pin definition of the seventh analog input module (slot 28,29)
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

01

Ia_Bay25

Phase A current from CT of bay 25 (polarity mark)

02

Ian_Bay25

Phase A current from CT of bay 25

03

Ib_Bay25

Phase B current from CT of bay 25 (polarity mark)

04

Ibn_Bay25

Phase B current from CT of bay 25

6-26

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware
Pin No.

Symbol

Description

05

Ic_Bay25

Phase C current from CT of bay 25 (polarity mark)

06

Icn_Bay25

Phase C current from CT of bay 25

07

Ua_BB1

Phase A voltage of BB1 (polarity mark)

08

Uan_BB1

Phase A voltage of BB1

09

Ub_BB1

Phase B voltage of BB1 (polarity mark)

10

Ubn_BB1

Phase B voltage of BB1

11

Uc_BB1

Phase C voltage of BB1 (polarity mark)

12

Ucn_BB1

Phase C voltage of BB1

13

Ua_BB2

Phase A voltage of BB2 (polarity mark)

14

Uan_BB2

Phase A voltage of BB2

15

Ub_BB2

Phase B voltage of BB2 (polarity mark)

16

Ubn_BB2

Phase B voltage of BB2

17

Uc_BB2

Phase C voltage of BB2 (polarity mark)

18

Ucn_BB2

Phase C voltage of BB2

19

Reserved

Reserved

20

Reserved

Reserved

21

Reserved

Reserved

22

Reserved

Reserved

23

Reserved

Reserved

24

Reserved

Reserved

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

6-27
Date: 2012-08-31

6 Hardware

6-28

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

7 Settings
Table of Contents
7 Settings ........................................................................................... 7-a
7.1 System Settings .............................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-4
7.3 Busbar Protection Settings ............................................................................ 7-5
7.4 Breaker Failure Protection Settings .............................................................. 7-7
7.5 Logic Settings ................................................................................................. 7-9
7.6 Virtual Binary Input Settings ........................................................................ 7-10
7.7 Communication Settings ............................................................................... 7-11
7.8 Label Settings ............................................................................................... 7-15

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-a
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

Settings are classified to two kinds, protection settings and common settings. Each protection
element has its independent setting menu. Common settings consist of device settings,
communication settings, label settings, system settings and VEBI settings.
PCS-915 has ten protection setting groups to coordinate with the different modes of power system
operation. One of these setting groups is assigned to be active. However, common settings are
shared by all protection setting groups.
All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by
reference CT ratio.

7.1 System Settings

Setting list
No.

Item

Setting Range

Default Setting

Active_Grp

1~10

PrimaryEquip_ID

6 characters maximum

PCS915

U1n

1.0~1200kV

220.00kV

U2n

1~100V

57.70V

I1n_Bay01

0~9999A

1200A

I1n_Bay02

0~9999A

1200A

I1n_Bay03

0~9999A

1200A

I1n_Bay04

0~9999A

1200A

I1n_Bay05

0~9999A

1200A

10

I1n_Bay06

0~9999A

1200A

11

I1n_Bay07

0~9999A

1200A

12

I1n_Bay08

0~9999A

1200A

13

I1n_Bay09

0~9999A

1200A

14

I1n_Bay10

0~9999A

1200A

15

I1n_Bay11

0~9999A

1200A

16

I1n_Bay12

0~9999A

1200A

17

I1n_Bay13

0~9999A

1200A

18

I1n_Bay14

0~9999A

1200A

19

I1n_Bay15

0~9999A

1200A

20

I1n_Bay16

0~9999A

1200A

21

I1n_Bay17

0~9999A

1200A

22

I1n_Bay18

0~9999A

1200A

23

I1n_Bay19

0~9999A

1200A

24

I1n_Bay20

0~9999A

1200A

25

I1n_Bay21

0~9999A

1200A

26

I1n_Bay22

0~9999A

1200A

27

I1n_Bay23

0~9999A

1200A

28

I1n_Bay24

0~9999A

1200A

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-1
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings
No.

Item

Setting Range

Default Setting

29

I1n_Bay25

0~9999A

1200A

30

I1n_CT_Base

0~9999A

1200A

31

I2n_CT_Base

1A or 5A

1A

32

Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode

0, 1

1: unearthed; 0: earthed

33

En_SingleBB

0, 1

Single busbar arrangement

34

En_SingleBB_with_SingleBS

0, 1

35

Cfg_DS_BB1

00000000~01FFFFFE

36

Cfg_DS_BB2

00000000~01FFFFFE

Setting description

1.

[Active_Grp]

Single busbar with single bus


section arrangement
Disconnector

position

configuration setting of BB1


Disconnector

position

configuration setting of BB2

Number of active setting group; ten setting groups can be configured for busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection, and only one is active at a time.
2.

[PrimaryEquip_ID]

Protected primary equipment identity; Equipment can be identified by 6 alphanumeric digits.


3.

[U1n]

Primary rated phase-to-phase voltage of VT.


4.

[U2n]

Secondary rated phase-to-phase voltage of VT.


5.

[I1n_Bayxx] (xx can be 01~25)

Primary rated current of the CT of bay xx. It should be set as 0 if the corresponding bay is not
used.
6.

[I1n_CT_Base]

Rated primary current of reference CT.


This setting is used in case that the rated CT primary currents of each feeder connected to busbar
are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.
If the maximum CT ratio is two times larger than the minimum CT ratio, in order to ensure
accuracy, the rated primary current of reference CT shall be half of the maximal rated primary
current.
For example, assume only 3 feeders are connected to the busbar. The CT ratios are 600:5 (feeder
02), 600:5 (feeder 03) and 1200:5 (feeder 04). Then, this setting should be set as 600.
7.

[I2n_CT_Base]

7-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

The rated secondary current of reference CT. This setting is used in case that the rated secondary
current of each feeder connected to busbar are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most
applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.
8.

[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]

When PCS-915 is applied to an unearthed system, logic setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]


should be set as 1. It will affect the settings of voltage controlled element, please refer to Section
3.2.3 and Section 3.4.3, and the criterion of VT circuit supervision will also change, please refer to
Section 3.6.
9.

[En_SingleBB]

When PCS-915 is applied to single busbar arrangement, it should be set as 1. The feeder of
which the primary rated current is not zero will be regarded as connecting to the busbar.
10. [En_SingleBB_with_SingleBS]
When PCS-915 is applied to single busbar with single bus section arrangement, it should be set as
1, then the system setting [Cfg_DS_BBx] (x=1, 2) is used to indicate which busbar zone the
feeder is connected to.
If [En_SingleBB] and [En_SingleBB_with_SingleBS] are all set as 0, double busbars
arrangement will be taken as the actual busbar arrangement by the device.
11. Cfg_DS_BBx (x=1 or 2)
Disconnector position configuration setting of BBx. In the case of single busbar with bus section
arrangement, the setting is used to indicate which busbar zone the feeder is connected to. The
setting is consisted of 32 binary digits but 8 hexadecimal digits can be viewed through device LCD
screen. The definition of the system setting is as follows.

Bay 09

Bay 08

Bay 07

Bay 06

Bay 05

Bay 04

Bay 03

Bay 02

Bay 01

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Bay 24

Bay 23

Bay 22

Bay 21

Bay 20

Bay 19

Bay 18

Bay 17

Bay 25

Bay 10

Bay 11

Bay 12

Bay 13

Bay 14

10

11

Bay 5

12

13

Bay 16

14

15

When the system setting [En_SingleBB_with_SingleBS] is set as 1, it is not needed that using
auxiliary contact of disconnector to identify the position of feeder. The feeder bay is connected to
BBx if corresponding binary digit of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is set as 1.
Generally, Bay 01 is connected with BC, so bit 0 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is not used. For double-CT BC,
bay 01 and bay 02 will be occupied, so bit 0 and bit 1 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] are not used.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-3
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

Note!

The maximum short circuit current of various CT shall not exceed 30In. In order to ensure
accuracy, difference of various CT ratios shall not be too high. Maximum summation of
corrected secondary currents of various CT during short circuit condition shall not exceed
80In. All displayed current values include both the corrected secondary currents and
original currents.

Access path:

MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings

7.2 Device Settings

Setting list

No.

Item

Description

Setting Range

Select encoding format of header (HDR) file


1

HDR_EncodedMode

COMTRADE recording file. Default value is

GB18030, UTF-8

UTF-8.
2

Un_BinaryInput_Bx

Setting description

1.

Voltage level of binary input for the module that

0:24V, 1:48V

located in slot No.x

2:110V, 3:220V

[HDR_EncodeMode]

Default value of [HDR_EncodeMode] is 1((i.e. UTF-8 code) and please set it to 0 (i.e. GB18030)
according to the special requirement.
2.

[Un_BinaryInput_Bx]

The setting is used to set the voltage level of corresponding binary input module. For
high-voltage BI modules, 110V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement. For
low-voltage BI modules, 24V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement.
0: 24V
1: 48V
2: 110V
3: 220V

Access path:

MainMenuSettingsProduct SetupDevice Settings

7-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

7.3 Busbar Protection Settings

Setting list

No.

Item

Description

Setting Range

I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP

Pickup value of differential current

0.05In ~20In

I_OC_SOTF_BC

Current setting of BC SOTF protection

0.05In ~20In

I_OC_BC

Current setting of BC OC protection

0.05In ~20In

I_ROC_BC

Residual current setting of BC OC protection

0.05In ~20In

t_OC_BC

Time delay of BC OC protection

0~10.000s

I_ROC_PD_BC

Residual setting of BC PD protection

0~20In

I_NegOC_PD_BC

Negative sequence setting of BC PD protection

0~20In

t_PD_BC

Time delay of BC PD protection

0~10.000s

I_Alm_SensCTS

Current setting of CT circuit abnormality

0.05In ~20In

10

I_Alm_CTS

Current setting of CT circuit failure

0.05In ~20In

11

V_UV_VCE_BBP

Voltage setting of VCE for BBP

0~1.732U2n

12

V_ROV_VCE_BBP

Residual voltage setting of VCE for BBP

0~U2n

13

V_NegOV_VCE_BBP

Negative-sequence voltage setting of VCE for BBP

0~U2n

14

I_BFP_BC

Current setting of BC/BS BFP

0~20In

15

t_TrpBB_BFP_BC

Time delay of BC/BS BFP

0.01~10.00s

In: Rated secondary current of reference CT


U2n: Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.

1.

Setting description
[I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP]

It should ensure sensitive enough in minimum operation mode and should be greater than
maximum load current of its outlets.
2.

[I_OC_SOTF_BC]

It should make BC SOTF protection sensitive enough to operate when energizing busbar in
minimum operation mode.
3.

[I_OC_BC]

It should make BC OC protection sensitive enough to operate when there is a phase-to-phase


fault occurring in the end of feeder energized and it should be greater than the load current flowing
through BC breaker.
4.

[I_ROC_BC]

It should make BC OC protection sensitive enough to operate when there is an earth fault
occurring in the end of feeder energized.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-5
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

5.

[t_OC_BC]

It should be set according to actual project requirement.


6.

[I_ROC_PD_BC]

It should be greater than maximum unbalance residual current in maximum operation mode.
7.

[I_NegOC_PD_BC]

It should be greater than maximum unbalance negative sequence current in maximum operation
mode.
8.

[t_PD_BC]

It should be greater than maximum inconsistent time of three phase interrupters when bus coupler
breaker is in the process of being closed.
9.

[I_Alm_SensCTS]

It is used to better response the abnormality of CT circuit in light load feeder and shunt of CT
circuit, etc. It should be more sensitive than [I_Alm_CTS] and can be set as 1.5~2 times of
differential current displayed in maximum operation mode.
10.

[I_Alm_CTS]

It should be greater than unbalance current in normal operation mode.


11.

[V_UV_VCE_BBP]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is a symmetric fault occurring in the busbar zone.
The recommended value is 35~40V. When the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set
as 1, the setting should be set as phase-to-phase voltage.
12.

[V_ROV_VCE_BBP]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than maximum unbalance residual voltage in normal operation mode.
The recommended value is 6~10V. When the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as
1, the setting is invalid.
13.

[V_NegOV_VCE_BBP]

It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than the negative sequence component of maximum unbalance
voltage in normal operation mode. The recommended value is 4~8V.
14.

[I_BFP_BC]

It should be set as minimum fault current flowing through BC/BS breaker. The influence of power
system topology change on fault current after BBP operating shall be considered.
15.

[t_TrpBB_BFP_BC]

It should be greater than maximal arc-extinguishing time of BC/BS breaker.


7-6

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

Access path

MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBBP Settings

7.4 Breaker Failure Protection Settings

Setting list
Common BFP Settings

No.

Item

Description

Setting
Range

t_ReTrp_BFP

Time delay of BFP operating to re-trip target breaker

0~10s

t_TrpBC_BFP

Time delay of BFP operating to trip BC breaker

0~10s

t_TrpBB_BFP

Time delay of BFP operating to trip busbar zone

0~10s

V_UV_VCE_BFP

Voltage setting of VCE

0~1.732U2n

V_ROV_VCE_BFP

Residual voltage setting of VCE

0~U2n

V_NegOV_VCE_BFP

Negative sequence voltage setting of VCE

0~U2n

BFP Settings of each feeder


No.

Item

Description

Settings
Range

I_OC_BFP_BT

Phase current setting of BFP of the substituted feeder

0~20IN

I_ROC_BFP_BT

Residual current setting of BFP of the substituted feeder

0~20IN

I_NegOC_BFP_BT

En_ROC_BFP_BT

En_NegOC_BFP_BT

Disable_VCE_BFP_BT

Negative-sequence current setting of BFP of the


substituted feeder
Residual current criterion of BFP for substituted feeder
Negative sequence current criterion of BFP for
substituted feeder
Logic setting of disabling BFP of substituted feeder to be
controlled by VCE

0~20IN
0 or 1
0 or 1

0 or 1

I_OC_BFP_Bayxx

Phase current setting of BFP for bay xx

0~20IN

I_ROC_BFP_Bayxx

Residual current setting of BFP for bay xx

0~20IN

I_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx

Negative sequence current setting of BFP for bay xx

0~20IN

10

En_ROC_BFP_Bayxx

Residual current criterion of BFP for bay xx

0 or 1

11

En_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx

Negative sequence current criterion of BFP for bay xx

0 or 1

12

Disable_VCE_BFP_Bayxx

1.

Logic setting of disabling BFP of bay xx to be controlled


by VCE

0 or 1

Settings description
[t_ReTrp_BFP]

It should be set as greater than 100ms and smaller than the setting i.e. [t_TrpBC_BFP]. The
recommended value is 0.15. The function of retripping target breaker can be disabled if it is set as
same as [t_TrpBC_BFP].

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-7
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

2.

[t_TrpBC_BFP]

It should be greater than the summation of operating time of breaker and reset time of protective
device with certain margin. The recommended value is 250ms~350ms.
3.

[t_TrpBB_BFP]

Based on the premise of BC breaker tripped, it should be greater than the summation of operating
time of BC breaker and reset time of protective device with certain margin. It should be as short as
possible on the premise of losing selectivity. The recommended value is 500ms~600ms.
4.

[V_UV_VCE_BFP]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a symmetrical fault occurring in the
end of the longest feeder and not to operate in the lowest operation voltage. After the fault is
cleared, the protective device can reset reliably. When the logic setting i.e.
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, it will be changed to phase-to-phase voltage. Please
refer to Section 3.4.3.
5.

[V_ROV_VCE_BFP]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in
the end of the longest line and be greater than residual voltage in normal operation mode. When
the logic setting i.e. [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as 1, it is invalid.
6.

[V_NegOV_VCE_BFP]

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in
the end of the longest line and be greater than negative sequence component of maximum
unbalance voltage in normal operation mode.
7.

[I_OC_BFP_Bayxx] (xx can be BT, 02~25)

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a fault occurring in end of feeder or
in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than maximum load
in normal operation mode.
8.

[I_ROC_BFP_Bayxx] (xx can be BT, 02~25)

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a single-phase earth fault occurring
in end of line or in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than
the maximum unbalance residual current in normal operation mode.
9.

[I_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx] (xx can be BT, 02~25)

It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a phase-to-phase fault occurring in
end of line or in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than
the maximum negative sequence unbalance current in normal operation mode.
10.

[En_ROC_BFP_Bayxx] (xx can be BT, 02~25)

If phase current setting of BFP can not avoid the influence of load current, it should be set as 1.

7-8

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

11.

[En_NegOC_BFP_Bayxx] (xx can be BT, 02~25)

If phase current setting of BFP can not avoid the influence of load current and residual current
setting of BFP is not sensitive enough to meet the project requirement, it should be set as 1.
12.

[Disable_VCE_BFP_Bayxx] (xx can be BT, 02~25)

If a fault occurs at LV side of transformer and the circuit breaker of HV side may fails to trip, feeder
BFP is needed to be initiated. In this case, HV side VCE may not pick up to release feeder BFP,
and therefore users can select feeder BFP not being controlled by VCE, i.e. connect the tripping
contact of HV side of transformer to the binary input [BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans] to initate feeder
BFP and set the logic setting to 1.

Access path:

MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBFP Settings


Note!
Because VCE of BFP is common for every feeder, the settings must be configured to
ensure it can pick up under maximum fault current mode when there is a fault occurring in
the end of feeder.

7.5 Logic Settings


These logic settings are used to configure protective function of the protective device. They can be
set as 1 or 0. Setting as 1 means that the corresponding protective function can be enabled or
valid, while setting as 0 means that the corresponding protective function is disabled or invalid.
The relation is AND among the logic setting, the corresponding binary input and the
corresponding virtual binary input.
Setting list

Table 7.5-1 Logic settings


No.

Item

Remark

En_BBP

busbar differential protection

En_BFP

breaker failure protection

En_SOTF_BC

SOTF protection for BC

En_OC_BC

overcurrent protection for BC

En_PD_BC

pole discrepancy protection for BC

En_BI_Blk_BBP

enable external binary input to block BBP

Setting Description

1.

[En_BI_Blk_BBP]

If it is set as 1, BBP will be blocked when the binary input [BI_Blk_BBP] from external protective
device is energized.
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-9
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsLogic Settings

7.6 Virtual Binary Input Settings


Virtual enable binary input (VEBI) is a kind of special logic setting to enable protection functions.
These virtual binary inputs can be configured through local HMI or remote PC (controlled by the
virtual binary input [VEBI_RmtCtrl]).
Each VEBI setting is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection is in service.
If the virtual binary input [VEBI_RmtCtrl] is set as 1, Through SAS or RTU, the VEBI settings
can be set as 1 or 0; and it means that the relevant protection can be in service or out of service
through remote command. It provides convenience for operation management.
These virtual binary inputs provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service
or out of service remotely away from an unattended substation.

Setting list

No.

Symbol

Range

Remark
Enable remote setting modification. Set it as 0 if only local

VEBI_RmtModifySettings

0, 1

setting modification is needed. Set it as 1 if local and remote


setting modification are both needed.
Enable remote active setting group modification. Set it as 0 if

VEBI_RmtChgSettingGrp

0, 1

only local active setting group modification is needed. Set it as


1 if local and remote active setting group modification are both
needed.
Enable remote VEBI modification. Set it as 0 if only local VEBI

VEBI_RmtCtrl

0, 1

modification is needed. Set it as 1 if local and remote VEBI


modification are both needed.
Virtual binary input to enable BBP, the relation is AND among

VEBI_BBP

0, 1

the virtual binary input [VEBI_BBP], the corresponding enable


isolator link [EBI_BBP] and the corresponding logic setting
[En_BBP].
Virtual binary input to enable BFP, the relation is AND among

VEBI_BFP

0, 1

the virtual binary input [VEBI_BFP], the corresponding enable


isolator link [EBI_BFP] and the corresponding logic setting
[En_BFP].
Virtual binary input to enable BC SOTF protection, the relation is

VEBI_SOTF_BC

0, 1

AND among the virtual binary input [VEBI_SOTF_BC], the


corresponding enable isolator link [EBI_SOTF_BC] and the
corresponding logic setting [En_SOTF_BC].

VEBI_OC_BC

0, 1

Virtual binary input to enable BC overcurrent protection, the


relation is AND among the virtual binary input [VEBI_OC_BC],

7-10

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings
the corresponding enable isolator link [EBI_OC_BC] and the
corresponding logic setting [En_OC_BC].
Virtual binary input to enable BC PD protection, the relation is

VEBI_PD_BC

AND among the virtual binary input [VEBI_PD_BC], the

0, 1

corresponding enable isolator link [EBI_PD_BC] and the


corresponding logic setting [En_PD_BC].
Virtual binary input to confirm two busbars are separated as two

VEBI_Decoupled_BC

independent busbars. The relation is AND among the virtual

0, 1

binary input [VEBI_Decoupled_BC] and the corresponding


enable isolator link [EBI_Decoupled_BC].
Virtual binary input to confirm two busbars are under

10

VEBI_IntLink_Mode

inter-connected operation mode. The relation is OR among the

0, 1

virtual binary input [VEBI_IntLink_Mode] and the corresponding


enable isolator link [EBI_IntLink_Mode].

Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsVEBI Settings

7.7 Communication Settings

Setting list
Table 7.7-1 Communication settings

No.

Settings item

Range

Description

000.000.000.000~

IP_LAN1

Mask_LAN1

IP_LAN2

Mask_LAN2

En_LAN2

0: disable, 1: enable

Enable/disable the IP address of port 2.

IP_LAN3

0: disable, 1: enable

IP address of Ethernet port 3.

Mask_LAN3

En_LAN3

0: disable, 1: enable

Enable/disable the IP address of port 3.

IP_LAN4

0: disable, 1: enable

IP address of Ethernet port 4.

10

Mask_LAN4

11

En_LAN4

255.255.255.255
000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
0: disable, 1: enable

IP address of Ethernet port 1.

Subnet mask of Ethernet port1.

IP address of Ethernet port 2.

Subnet mask of Ethernet port 2.

Subnet mask of Ethernet port 3.

Subnet mask of Ethernet port 4.


Enable/disable the IP address of port 4.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-11
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings
No.

Settings item

Range

Description

000.000.000.000~

12

Gateway

13

En_Broadcast

0: disable, 1: enable

14

Fmt_Net_103

0, 1

15

Addr_RS485A

0255

255.255.255.255

Gateway of router
Enable/disable sending message in broadcast
mode via network. (IEC103).
Time scale format of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for
Ethernet port).
Communication address between the protective
device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial
port 1.

16

Baud_RS485A

17

Protocol_RS485A

4800,9600,19200,
38400,57600,115200 bps

Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 1.


Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port

09

1.
Spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN

18

Inf_RS485A_103

0, 1

and INF based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for


RS-485 serial port 1).

19

Fmt_RS485A_103

Time scale format of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for

0, 1

RS-485 serial port 1).


Communication address between the protective

20

Addr_RS485B

0255

device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial


port 2.

21

Baud_RS485B

22

Protocol_RS485B

4800,9600,19200,
38400,57600,115200 bps
02

Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 2.


Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port
2.
Spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN

23

Inf_RS485B_103

0, 1

and INF based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for


RS-485 serial port 2).

24

Fmt_RS485B_103

0, 1

Time scale format of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (for


RS-485 serial port 2).
Threshold value of sending measurement values to

25

Threshold_Measmt

0~100%

SCADA through IEC103 or IEC61850 protocol.


Default value: 1%.
The time period when the equipment sends

26

Period_Measmt

0~65535s

measurement data to SCADA through IEC103


protocol.
Default value:60.

27

Format_Measmt

0, 1

Select the format of measurement data sent to


SCADA through IEC103 protocol.

7-12

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings
No.

Settings item

Range

Description

4800,9600,
28

Baud_Printer

19200,38400, 51600,

Baud rate of printer port

115200 bps
29

0: disable

En_AutoPrint

Enable/disable automatic printing function

1: enable
Conventional

30

SAS

Opt_TimeSync

Select the mode of time synchronization of

Advanced

equipment.

NoTImeSyn

31

IP_Server_SNTP

32

Opt_DisplayValue

Setting description

1.

000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255

The

address

of

the

external

SNTP

clock

synchronization server sending SNTP message to


the equipment.

Primary value/

Measurement values are displayed in primary value

Second value

or secondary value

[En_LANx] (x= 2, 3, 4)

These setting are used to enable/disable IP addresses of Ethernet 2, 3 and 4 respectively. IP


address of Ethernet 1 is enabled fixedly.
1: enable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is needed to
be set.
0: disable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is not needed
to be set.
2.

[En_Broadcast]

This setting is only used only for IEC 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the
setting must be set as 1.
0: the device does not send UDP messages through network;
1: the device sends UDP messages through network.
3.

Fmt_Net_103

If the setting is set as0, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e.
4-byte time scale format.
If the setting is set as1, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e.
7-byte time scale format.
4.

[Protocol_RS485x] (x=A, B)

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-13
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings

The setting is used to select the communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port X.
0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: Reserved
2: Modbus protocol
5.

Inf_RS485A_103, Inf_RS485B_103

When spontaneous events are sent via generic services based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this
setting should be setting as 0. When spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN and INF
based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this setting should be set as 1.
6.

Fmt_RS485A_103/Fmt_RS485B_103

The setting is invalid if the setting [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as1.


If the setting is set as0 and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as 0, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e. 4-byte time scale format.
If the setting is set as1 and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as 0, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e. 7-byte time scale format.
7.

[Format_Measmt]

The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.
0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12;
1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 shorth real number of IEEE standard.
8.

[En_AutoPrint]

If automatic print is required for disturbance report after protection operating, the setting should be
set as 1.
9.

[Opt_TimeSyn]

There are four selectons for clock synchronization of device, each selection includs different time
clock synchronization signals shown in following table.
Item

Description
PPS(RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.

Conventional

IRIG-B(RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.


PPM(DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS(DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.

SAS

SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.


Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol.

7-14

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings
Item

Description
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588.

Advanced

IRIG-B(Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.


PPS(Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select

NoTimeSync

this option and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSync] will not be issued anymore.

Conventional mode and SAS mode are always be supported by device, but Advanced mdoe
is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] may be
issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.
1)

When SAS is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When Conventionalmode is slected, if there is
no conventional clock synchronization signal, SASmode will be enabled automatically with
the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.

2)

When Advanced mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal


connected to NET-DSP moduelSASmode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.

3)

When NoTimeSyn mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without
NOTE! The clock message via IEC103 protocol is invalid when the device receives the
IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port.

10.

[IP_Server_SNTP]

It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.

Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsCommunication Settings

7.8 Label Settings

Setting list
Table 7.8-1 Setting list of lab settings
No.

Symbol

Default Setting

NameDef_Bus1

BB1

NameDef_Bus2

BB2

NameDef_Bay01

Bay01

NameDef_Bay02

Bay02

NameDef_Bay03

Bay03

NameDef_Bay04

Bay04

NameDef_Bay05

Bay05

Remark
They can be set by 6 characters at most.
The description parameter of each
feeder and busbar will influence the
display of all reports and meterings.
Taking default setting as an example to
introduce in this instruction manual.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

7-15
Date: 2012-08-31

7 Settings
8

NameDef_Bay06

Bay06

NameDef_Bay07

Bay07

10

NameDef_Bay08

Bay08

11

NameDef_Bay09

Bay09

12

NameDef_Bay10

Bay10

13

NameDef_Bay11

Bay11

14

NameDef_Bay12

Bay12

15

NameDef_Bay13

Bay13

16

NameDef_Bay14

Bay14

17

NameDef_Bay15

Bay15

18

NameDef_Bay16

Bay16

19

NameDef_Bay17

Bay17

20

NameDef_Bay18

Bay18

21

NameDef_Bay19

Bay19

22

NameDef_Bay20

Bay20

23

NameDef_Bay21

Bay21

24

NameDef_Bay22

Bay22

25

NameDef_Bay23

Bay23

26

NameDef_Bay24

Bay24

27

NameDef_Bay25

Bay25

These setting are used to definite the description of the feeder and bus coupler.

Access Path:

MainMenuSettingsLabel Settings

7-16

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-31

8 Human Machine Interface

8 Human Machine Interface


Table of Contents
8 Human Machine Interface .............................................................. 8-a
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview .............................................................. 8-5
8.1.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.1.3 LED Indications.................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.1.4 Front Communication Port................................................................................................... 8-8
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-8

8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ...................................................................... 8-9


8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.2.2 Measurements ....................................................................................................................8-11
8.2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.2.4 Records.............................................................................................................................. 8-13
8.2.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 8-13
8.2.6 Print.................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.7 Local Cmd .......................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.2.8 Information ......................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.2.9 Test .................................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.2.10 Clock ................................................................................................................................ 8-18
8.2.11 Language ......................................................................................................................... 8-18

8.3 Understand LCD Display .............................................................................. 8-18


8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-18
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation ...................................................................................... 8-18
8.3.3 Display When Tripping ....................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition ..................................................................................... 8-22
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Changes Status ..................................................................... 8-22

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-a
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

8.3.6 Display Control Report ...................................................................................................... 8-23

8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-24


8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values ............................................................................................ 8-24
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals ............................................................................................. 8-24
8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.4 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-26
8.4.6 Copy Device Setting .......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.4.7 Print Device Records ......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-30
8.4.9 Delete Records .................................................................................................................. 8-31
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-32
8.4.11 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.12 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.13 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-34
8.4.14 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-34

List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel of 8U chassis ..................................................................................... 8-5
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel .................................................................... 8-6
Figure 8.1-3 the figure shows the LED indications ..................................................................... 8-7
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-8
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C ................................................... 8-9
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915 .......................................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram .................................................................... 8-19
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ................................................................................ 8-20
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report................................................... 8-21
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report................................................................................ 8-22
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report ............................................................... 8-23
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report ..................................................................................... 8-23

8-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password ........................................................................... 8-27


Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings ..................................................................................... 8-29
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group .................................................................... 8-31
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report ................................................................................... 8-32
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock ................................................................................. 8-33
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language ............................................................................ 8-35

List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-8
Table 8.3-1 User Operating event list ...................................................................................... 8-24

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-c
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

8-d

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview


The human-machine interface is implemented by human-machine interface (HMI) module
which includes the following components:

A 320240 backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status, fault
diagnostics and setting, etc.

LED indicators on the front panel for denoting the status of this protection operation.

A 9-key keypad on the front panel of the device for full access to the device.

5
PCS-915

HEALTHY

BUSBAR PROTECTION

MISC ALM
GR
P

PT/CT ALM

DS ALM
BBP TRIP
BFP TRIP
MISC TRIP

ES

ENT

Figure 8.1-1 Front panel of 8U chassis


Indication No.

Description

A 320240 dots liquid crystal display

20 LED indicators

A 9-key keypad

A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC

LOG, device type and name

8.1.1 Functionality

The HMI module helps to view activated LED or a report display on the LCD after an

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-5
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

incident occurred.

Operator is free to browse the data.

Navigate through the menu commands to locate the interested data.

8.1.2 Keypad and Keys


The keypad and keys on the front panel of the device provide convenience to the operator to view
data or change the devices setting.

GR
P
ESC

The keypad contains nine keys with different function. Following figure shows the keypad and
keys.

ENT

+
-

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel


No.

Symbol
,

and

, arrow buttons

Description

Move between selectable branches of the menu tree.

+, -

Change parameters or setting values.

ENT

Provide Enter/Execute function.

GRP

Setting Group selection.

ESC

Exit the present level in the menu tree.

Note!

Any setting change shall be confirmed by pressing +, , , -, ENT in sequence.

Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing +, -, +, -, ENT in sequence.

8-6

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

8.1.3 LED Indications


HEALTHY

MISC_ALM
VT/CT_ ALM

DS_ ALM
BBP_ TRIP
BFP_ TRIP
MISC_ TRIP

Figure 8.1-3 the figure shows the LED indications

A brief explanation has been made as bellow.


LED

Display
Off

HEALTHY

Description
When the device is out of service or any hardware error is detected
during self-check.

Green

Lit when the device is in service and ready for operation.

Off

When device in normal operating condition.

Yellow

Lit when other abnormality occurs.

Off

when the device is in normal operating condition.

Yellow

Lit when VT circuit failure or CT circuit failure occurs.

Off

when the device is in normal operating condition.

Yellow

Lit when disconnector position is abnormal

Off

when the device is in normal operating condition.

Red

Lit when busbar differential protection operates to trip.

Off

when the device is in normal operating condition.

Red

Lit when breaker failure protection operates to trip.

Off

when the device is in normal operating condition.

MISC_ALM

VT/CT_ALM

DS_ALM

BBP_TRIP

BFP_TRIP

MISC_TRIP
Red

Lit when BC/BS protection operates or other protective element


operates to trip BC/BS

Note!

The HEALTHY LED can only be turned on by energizing the device again to restart the
relay.

xx_ALM LED is turned on when corresponding abnormalities mentioned above occurs


and turned off if the abnormalities are removed except for CT circuit failure alarm
[Alm_CTS]. [Alm_CTS] can only be reset when the failure is removed and the device is
rebooted or the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] is energized.

The xx_TRIP LED is turned and latched once any protection element operates. The

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-7
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

xx_TRIP LED can be turned off by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg].

8.1.4 Front Communication Port


There is a multiplex RJ45 port in the front panel of the device. This port can be used as an RS-232
serial port as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized
cable is applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.

Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel

In the above figure and the following table:


P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Terminal
No.

Core color

Function

Device side

Computer side

(Left)

(Right)

Orange

TX+ of the ethernet port

P1-1

P2-1

Orange & white

TX- of the ethernet port

P1-2

P2-2

Green & white

RX+ of the ethernet port

P1-3

P2-3

Blue

TXD of the RS-232 serial port

P1-4

P3-2

Brown & white

RXD of the RS-232 serial port

P1-5

P3-3

Green

RX- for the ethernet port

P1-6

P2-6

Blue & white

The ground connection of the RS-232 port.

P1-7

P3-5

8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup


MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102C
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-5. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-PC) after
connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-PC). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu Settingsproduct SetupCommunication Settings, it should be
ensured that the protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting
8-8

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

the IP address and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as 198.87.96.102, subnet mask is set as 255.255.255.0
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.

NR1102C

ETHERNET

Network A

Network B

SYN+
SYNSGND
GND
RXD
TXD
SGND
GND

Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C

Note!
If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be
set as 1.

8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree


8.2.1 Overview
Press of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by and
. Enter the selected submenu by pressing ENT or . Press and return to the previous
menu. Press ESC and exit the main menu directly. For sake of executing the command menu
again, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. At most five
latest menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. When the five menu commands are
recorded, the latest menu command will cover the earliest one, adopting the first in first out
principle. It is arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-9
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

menus. Press to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Quick Menu

Language
Main Menu

For the first powered protective device, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press to enter the
main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
E

Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language

8-10

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface


Main Menu
Measurements
Prot Measurements

Print

Information

Device Info

Version Info
Board Info

Settings
Measured Values
Phase Angle
Cal Values

System Settings
Prot Settings
BBP Settings
BFP Settings

FD Measurements
Measured Values
Phase Angle
Cal Values

Test
Device Test

Logic Settings

Prot Elements
All Test
Select Test

VEBI Settings
Product Setup

Superv Events

Device Settings
Communication Settings

Status

All Test
Select Test

Label Settings

Inputs

All Settings
Prot Inputs
Bay Inputs
Function Inputs
FD Inputs
Bay Inputs
Function Inputs
Contact Inputs
Superv State

IO Events

Latest Chgd Settings

All Test
Select Test

Disturb Records
Superv Events

Internal Signal

IO Events

Zone Cal BI

Device Logs

Bay Info

Device Status

bay25

Waveforms

Diff Wave

bay02

Oscillogram1

Prot Superv

Oscillogram2

FD Superv

Oscillogram3

bay01
bus2
bus1

Oscillogram4
Oscillogram5
Records

Oscillogram6

Disturb Records
Superv Events

Disturb Record Items

IEC103 Info
Cancel Print

Clock

IO Events
Device Logs
Local Cmd
Settings

Language

Reset Target
Trig Oscillograph

System Settings

Confirm DS

Prot Settings

Download

BBP Settings
BFP Settings
Logic Settings
VEBI Settings
Product Setup
Device Settings
Communication Settings
Label Settings
Copy Settings

Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915

Under the main interface, press to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing ,
and ENT. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.

8.2.2 Measurements
This menu is used to display real time AC voltage and AC current sampled values of the protective
device. These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device.
This menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 5.2 about the details of
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-11
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

sampled values.
No.

Item

Description

Prot Measurements

Display sampled values on protection DSP module.

FD Measurements

Display sampled values on fault detector DSP module.

8.2.2.1 Prot Measurements


The submenu Prot Measurements has following submenus.
No.

Item

Description
Display measured analog values on protection DSP module (have been

Measured Values

Phase Angle

Display phase angles on protection DSP module.

Cal Values

Display measured values for debugging on protection DSP module.

converted to the referenced side).

8.2.2.2 FD Measurements
The submenu FD Measurements has following lower submenus.
No.

Item

Description
Display measured analog values on fault detector DSP module (have been

Measured Values

Phase Angle

Display phase angles on fault detector DSP module.

Cal Values

Display measured values for debugging on fault detector DSP module.

converted to the referenced side).

8.2.3 Status
This menu is used to display real time binary inputs and alarm signals of the protective device.
These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device. This menu
comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 6.2.5 about the details of binary inputs and
Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals.
No.

Item

Description

Inputs

Display the status of binary inputs

Superv State

Display the status of alarm signals

8.2.3.1 Inputs
The submenu Inputs has following submenus.
No.

Item

Prot Inputs

FD Inputs

Description
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of protection DSP
module
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of fault detector
DSP module

8-12

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface


No.
3

Item
Contact Inputs

Description
Display the status of contact inputs

(1) The submenu Prot Inputs includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Bay Inputs

Function Inputs

Description
Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on protection DSP module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on protection DSP
module.

(2) The submenu FD Inputs includes the following command menus.


No.

Item

Bay Inputs

Function Inputs

Description
Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on fault detector DSP
module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on fault detector DSP
module.

8.2.3.2 Superv State


The submenu Superv State has following submenus.
No.

Item

Description

Prot Superv

Display the status of self-supervision signals on protection DSP module

FD Superv

Display the status of self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP module

8.2.4 Records
This menu displays protection tripping report, self-supervision report, binary input change report
and control report. The protective device can store 1024 pieces of recorders for each kind of report
in non-volatile memory.
No.

Item

Description

Disturb Records

View the tripping report

Superv Events

View the self-supervision report

IO Events

View the binary input change report

Device Logs

View the control report

8.2.5 Settings
This submenu is used to browse, modify and set all settings including device settings,
communication parameters, label settings, VEBI settings, system settings and protection settings.
The submenu Settings includes the following command menus.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-13
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface


No.

Item

Function description

System Settings

Set the system settings

Prot Settings

Set the protection settings

VEBI Settings

Set the virtual enabling binary input settings

Product Setup

Set the settings related to device setup

Copy Settings

To copy settings from one group to another group

8.2.5.1 Product Setup


The submenu Product Setup includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

Device Settings

Set the device settings

Communication Settings

Set the communication settings.

Label Settings

Set the label settings of each protected element.

8.2.5.2 Prot Settings


The submenu Prot Settings includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

BBP Settings

Set the settings about busbar protection

BFP Settings

Set the settings about breaker failure protection

Logic Settings

Set the Logic settings

8.2.6 Print
This menu is used to print the self-supervision report, binary input change report, waveform and
the information related with settings, fault report and 103 protocol, and so on.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:
No.
1

Item
Device Info

Description
Print the description information of protective device.
Print settings, includes device settings, communication parameters, label

Settings

settings, VEBI settings, system settings, and protection settings. It can print
by different classifications as well as printing all settings of the device.
Besides, it can also print out the latest modified setting item.

Disturb Records

Print trip reports.

Superv Events

Print self-check alarm and device operation abnormal alarm reports.

IO Events

Print status change of binary signal.

Device Status

Print all the values measured by the device

Waveforms

Print recorded waveforms.

8-14

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface


Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN), information
8

IEC103 Info

serial number (INF), general classification service group number, and


channel number (ACC).

Cancel Print

Cancel the print command

8.2.6.1 Settings
The submenu Settings includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

System Settings

Print the system settings

Prot Settings

Print the protection settings

VEBI Settings

Print the virtual enabling binary input settings

Product Setup

Print the settings related to product setup

All Settings

Latest Modified

Print the content of all settings including product setups, system settings,
protection settings and VEBI settings.
Print the content of the latest modified setting

(1) The submenu Product Setup includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

Device Settings

Print the device settings.

Communication Settings

Print the communication settings.

Label Settings

Print the label settings of protective device.

(2) The submenu Prot Settings includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

BBP Settings

Print the settings about busbar protection

BFP Settings

Print the settings about breaker failure protection

Logic Settings

Print the Logic settings

8.2.6.2 Waveforms
The submenu Waveforms has following submenus.
No.

Item

Description

Diff Wave

To print differential current waveforms

Oscillogram1

To print current waveforms of bay 02~06

Oscillogram2

To print current waveforms of bay 07~11

Oscillogram3

To print current waveforms of bay 12~16

Oscillogram4

To print current waveforms of bay 17~21

Oscillogram5

To print current waveforms of bay 22~25

Oscillogram6

To print current waveforms of BC

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-15
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

8.2.7 Local Cmd


This menu is used to reset the latched tripping relay, protection device signal lamp and LCD
display. It can record the currently acquired waveform of the protection device under normal
condition for printing and uploading to substation automatic system (SAS). Besides, it can send
out the request of program download.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

Reset Target

Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.

Trig Oscillograph

Trigger waveform recording.

Confirm DS

Confirm the disconnector position

Download

Send out the download request.

8.2.8 Information
In this menu the LCD displays current working state of each intelligent module and software
information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,

Version Info

which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and


management sequence number.

Board Info

Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.

8.2.9 Test
This menu is used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the device.
It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the communication
test function. Its also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the SAS without
any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description
Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to the backstage,

Device Test

including tripping, self-check and binary signal transmission. It can realize


the transmission of messages of different classification.

Internal Signal

Disturb Record Items

Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit and
relevant information about each protected bay
Check the fault report one by one.

8.2.9.1 Device Test


The submenu Device Test has following submenus.
8-16

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface


No.

Item

Prot Elements

Superv Events

IO Events

Description
View the relevant information about tripping report (only used for debugging
persons)
View the relevant information about alarm report (only used for debugging
persons)
View the relevant information about binary input change report (only used
for debugging persons)

The submenu Prot Elements includes the following command menus.


No.

Item

Description

All Test

Ordinal test of all protection elements

Select Test

Selective test of corresponding classification

The submenu Superv Events includes the following command menus.


No.

Item

Description

All Test

Ordinal test of all self-supervisions

Select Test

Selective test of corresponding classification

The submenu IO Events includes the following command menus.


No.

Item

Description

All Test

Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs

Select Test

Selective test of corresponding classification

8.2.9.2 Internal Signal


The submenu Internal Signal has following submenus.
No.
1

Item
Zone Cal BI

Description
Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit
Display the relevant information about each protected bay. Please refer to

Bay Info

Section 5.2 about the details of sampled values, Section 6.2.5 about the
details of binary inputs and Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals.

The submenu Zone Cal BI will display the calculated virtual binary input of each bay for
differential circuit. It can help users to know the current composition of differential current. If the
value of the calculated virtual binary input of a bay for differential circuit is 1, it means that the
current of the bay is included in differential current.
Item
VBI_DSCZ_Bayxx
VBI_DZBBx_Bayxx

Description
Calculated binary input of bay xx for check zone differential circuit
Calculated binary input of bay xx for discriminating zone differential circuit of
BBx

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-17
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

x=1 or 2
xx=01~25
The submenu Bay Info has following submenus.
No.

Item

Description

bus1

Display the relevant information about BB No. 1

bus2

Dis play the relevant information about BB No. 2

bay01

Display the relevant information about bay 01

bay25

Display the relevant information about bay 25

8.2.10 Clock
The time of internal clock can be viewed in Clock option. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.

8.2.11 Language
This menu is mainly used for set LCD display language.

8.3 Understand LCD Display


8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, system topology if the protective device is under the normal
condition, tripping reports, alarm reports, binary input changing reports and control reports.
Tripping reports and alarm reports will not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by
pressing the reset button on the protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]).
User can press both ENT and ESC at the same time to switch the display among trip reports,
alarm reports and the SLD display. Binary change reports will be displayed for 5s and then itll
return to the previous display interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and can only
be viewed by navigating the corresponding menu.

8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation


After the protection device is powered and turns into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the
HEALTHY indicator of the protection device goes out.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display a diagram similar to the following interface. The LCD
adopts white color as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is
extinguished automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.

8-18

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface


Data and time of equipment clock

Communication address
Description of BB No.1
Description of BC
Phase-A current of BC

2010-4-28 10:10:00

Comm_Addr:098
Fdr02

BC

0.01A

Fdr04
0.01A

Fdr06
0.00A

Grp:01
Fdr08
0.00A

Active group number


Description of each feeder
Phase-A current of each feeder

0.01A
Disconnector (Closed)

BB1
Bus Coupler
means BC is open

BB2

Disconnector (Open)

means BC is closed
0.01A
Fdr03

Description of BB No.2

0.01A
Fdr05

0.00A
Fdr07

Three-phase voltage of BB No.1

BB1 Volt:

57.70V

57.70V

57.70V

Three-phase voltage of BB No.2

BB2 Volt:

57.70V

57.70V

57.70V

Three-phase differential current

DI:

0.00A

0.00A

0.01A
Fdr09

0.01A

Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram

Middle part displays single line diagram of the busbar and the bays whose CT correction
coefficient is not zero. The description of each bay (at most 6 digits or characters, please refer to
Section 7.8) and feeder current is shown by the side of the corresponding feeder. Three-phase
voltage of BBx (BBx Volt and x=1 or 2), check zone differential current (DI), discriminating zone
differential current of BBx (BBx_DI and x=1 or 2) are shown under the single line diagram.
If the protective device receives the signal of IRIG-B for time synchronization and can correctly
decode it, S will be displayed on the top left corner of LCD
If all feeders can not displayed in one page, the single line diagram will move automatically and
circularly from right to left if no key is pressed, and will move to left quickly by pressing key
continuously, move to right quickly by pressing key continuously.
The displayed content of the interface contains: the current date and time of the protection device
(with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the currently valid setting group number, the three-phase
current and voltage sampling values of each side, differential current etc.

8.3.3 Display When Tripping


This protection device can store 32 times of fault reports and 32 times of fault waveforms. When
there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report, and
two kinds of LCD display interfaces will be available depending on whether there is self-check
report at present.
If the device has no self-check report, the display interface will only show the fault report.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-19
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Disturb Records


0000ms
0006ms

Op_FD
A

Op_Trp_BB1_DPFC_BBP

0006ms

Bay01 Bay02 Bay03 Bay06


Bay12 Bay13 Bay15
Op_TrpBC_BBP

Id_max

1.05A

Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report

NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Disturb Records: shows the SOE number, the time when fault
detector picks up (the format is yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond) and title
of the report.
0000ms Op_FD

shows fault detector of protection element and operation


time of fault detector is set as 0ms fixedly.

0006ms A Op_Trp_BB1_DPFC_BBP
Bay01 Bay02 Bay03 Bay06
Bay12 Bay13 Bay15

shows the relative operation time of protection element,


protection elements and trip elements.

0006ms Op_TrpBC_BBP

shows the relative operation time and operation element


of protection element

Id_max 1.05A

shows the maximum differential current

For the situation that the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously in the
following figure, the upper half part is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. As to
the upper half part, it displays separately the record number of fault report, fault name, generating
time of fault report (with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), protection element and tripping element.
If there is protection element, there is relative time on the basis of fault detector element and fault
phase. At the same time, if the protection element and tripping element are too much and can not
displayed in the upper half part, it will move automatically and circularly from top to bottom if no
key is pressed.
The displayed content of the lower half part is the alarm element. If the alarm element is more than
one, all the alarm elements will displayed circularly one by one.

8-20

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Disturb Records


0000ms
0006ms

Op_FD
A

Op_Trp_BB1_DPFC_BBP

0006ms

Bay01 Bay02 Bay03 Bay06


Bay12 Bay13 Bay15
Op_TrpBC_BBP

Id_max

1.05A

Superv Events
Alm_52a&52b_BC

Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report

All the trip information are listed in the following tables:


1.

Operation elements

No.

Item

Description

Op_TrpBB1_DPFC_BBP

DPFC percentage differential protection operates to trip BB1.

Op_TrpBB2_DPFC_BBP

DPFC percentage differential protection operates to trip BB2.

Op_TrpBB1_Pcnt_BBP

Op_TrpBB2_Pcnt_BBP

Op_TrpBC_BBP

BBP operates to trip BC breaker.

Op_TrpBB_BFP_BC

BC BFP operates to trip busbar

Op_BFP_BB1

Op_BFP_BB2

Op_TrpBC_BFP

Feeder BFP operates to trip BC breaker

10

Op_Dly1_Pcnt_BBP

Stage 1 of backup busbar differential protection operates

11

Op_Dly2_Pcnt_BBP

Stage 2 of backup busbar differential protection operates

12

Op_IntTrp_BFP_Bayxx

13

Op_Retrip_Bayxx_BFP

14

Op_Retrip_BT_BFP

15

Op_TrpBC_PD

PD protection of BC/BS operates

16

Op_TrpBC_OC

BC/BS phase overcurrent protection operates

17

Op_TrpBC_ROC

BC/BS ground overcurrent protection operates

18

Op_EFP_BC

BC/BS end zone fault protection operates

19

Op_TrpBC_SOTF

BC/BS SOTF protection operates

Steady-state percentage differential protection operates to trip


BB1.
Steady-state percentage differential protection operates to trip
BB2.

BC or feeder BFP operates to trip all circuit breakers connected


to BB1.
BC or feeder BFP operates to trip all circuit breakers connected
to BB2.

Intertripping breakers of other sides of a main transformer if


circuit breaker of bay xx fails (xx=02, 03, 14 or 15)
BFP of bay xx operates to re-trip the breaker
BFP of the substituted bay operates to re-trip the breaker (When
BC is substituted a feeder breaker)

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-21
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface


No.

Item

Description

20

Op_FD

Fault detector picks up

21

Op_ManTrigOscillog

Oscillography function is triggered manually.

2.

Trip elements

No.
1

Item
Trp_Bayxx

Description
Trip bay xx (xx=01, 02, , 25)

8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition


This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device,
the self-check report of hardware self-check errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.

Superv Events
Alm_52b_BC

Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report

Superv Events

shows the title of the report

Alm_52b_BC

shows the content of abnormality alarm

If view the corresponding alarm report from the submenu Superv Events under the menu of
Records, the SOE number and the real time of the report will be contained with the alarm report.
All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter Automatic Supervision.

8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Changes Status


When any binary input state changes or VEBI setting is modified, a new report on change of status
will be automatically displayed on LCD as follows. This protective equipment can store 1024
binary input change reports. During the running of the equipment, the binary signals will be
displayed once the input signal state changes.

8-22

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface


IO Events NO.26
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
EBI_BBP

Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report

IO Events NO.26

shows the number and title of the report

2010-04-29 09:18:47:500

shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

EBI_BBP 0->1

shows the state change of binary input, including binary input name,
original state and final state

Binary inputs have been listed in input signal table in Chapter Hardware Description and virtual
binary inputs list in Chapter Setting and please refer to each protection element for details.

8.3.6 Display Control Report


This protection device can store 1024 pieces of the control report (i.e. user operating reports).
During the running of the protection device, the running report will be displayed after any operation
of it is conducted.

Device Logs NO.4


2010-04-29 10:18:47:569ms
Settings_Chgd

Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report

Device Logs NO. 4

shows the title and the number of the report

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-23
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

2010-04-29 10:18:47:569

shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

Settings_Chgd

shows the state content of the user operation report.

User operating information listed below may be displayed.


Table 8.3-1 User Operating event list
No.

Message

Description

Reboot

The protective equipment has been reboot.

Reset_Target

The protective equipment has been reset.

Settings_Chgd

The settings of protective equipment have been changed.

ActiveGrp_Chgd

Active setting group has been changed.

Report_Cleared

All reports have been deleted. (User operating event can not be deleted)

Waveform_Cleared

All waveforms have been deleted.

SubProcess_Exit

A Subprocess has exited.

8.4 Keypad Operation


8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values
The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Measurements menu, and then
press the ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
ENT to enter submenu.

4.

Press the key or to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5.

Press the key or to select pervious or next command menu.

6.

Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Measurements menu).

8.4.2 View Status of binary signals


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Status menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
ENT to enter submenu.

4.

Press the key or to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one

8-24

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).


5.

Press the key or to select pervious or next command menu.

6.

Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Status menu).

8.4.3 View Device Records


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Records menu, and then press the
key ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
key ENT to enter the submenu.

4.

Press the key or to page up/down.

5.

Press the key or to select pervious or next record.

6.

Press the key or to select pervious or next command menu.

7.

Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Records menu).

For the fault report, view the single item fault report by the command menu Disturb Record
Items, and the item fault report produces with change of any item of fault report. The item fault
report can save up to 1024 events.
The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Test menu, and then press the key
ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Disturb Record
Items, and then press the ENT to enter the menu.

4.

Press the key or to select pervious or next record.

5.

Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Test menu).

8.4.4 View Device Setting


Follow the steps below to view the device settings:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press
ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
ENT to enter the menu.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-25
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

4.

Press the key or to move the cursor.

5.

Press the key + or - to page up/down.

6.

Press the key or to select pervious or next command menu.

7.

Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Settings).
Note!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of
the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the
relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

8.4.5 Modify Device Setting


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press
ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
ENT to enter the menu.

4.

Press the key or to move the cursor.

5.

Press the key + or - to page up/down.

6.

Press the key or to select pervious or next command menu.

7.

Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Settings ).

8.

Select the command menu Device Settings, Label Settings, or


Communication Settings, users need to enter the submenu Product Setup
firstly. Select the command menu BBP Settings, BFP Settings or Logic
Settings, users need to enter the submenu Prot Settings firstly.
Following takes modification of system settings as an example.

1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press
ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu System
Settings, and then press ENT to enter the menu.

4.

Move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key ENT.

5.

Press the key or to modify the value (if the modified value is multi-bit, press
the key or to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the or to
modify the value), press the key ESC to cancel the modification and return to the

8-26

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

displayed interface of the command menu System Settings. Press the key ENT to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu System Settings).
6.

Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are
modified, press the key , or ESC, and the LCD will display Save or Not?.
Directly press the ESC or press the key or to move the cursor. Select the
Cancel, and then press the key ENT to automatically exit this menu (returning to
the displayed interface of the command menu System Settings).

7.

Press the key or to move the cursor. Select No and press the key ENT, all
modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the
menu Settings).

8.

Press the key or to move the cursor to select Yes, and then press the key
ENT, the LCD will display password input interface.

Password:

Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password

9.

Input a 4-bit password (, , or ). If the password is incorrect, continue


inputting it, then press ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu System Settings. If the password is
correct, LCD will display Save Settings, and then exit this menu (returning to the
displayed interface of the command menu System Settings). The device setting
modification is completed.

Note!

The above modification instructions are available for all setting items.

Note!

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-27
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

After modifying the settings in menu System Settings or Prot Settings, the
HEALTHY indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will
automatically restart and re-check the settings. The device will be blocked until the check
process is finished. If selecting the command menu of protection element such as BBP
Settings, the LCD will display the following interface:

2. BBP Settings
Please Select Group for Config
Active Group:

01

Selected Group:

01

Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings

Then move the cursor to the modified value and press ENT to enter. For example, if the setting
[I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP] need to be modified, press the ENT to enter and the LCD will display the
interface as below. Press the or to modify the value and then press the ENT to enter.

I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP

Current Value

5.00

Modified Value

005.00

Min Value

0.05

Max Value

20.00

Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings

10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
8-28

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

press the ENT.

8.4.6 Copy Device Setting


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press the
key ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Copy Settings,
and then press the key ENT to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on
LCD.

Copy Settings

Active Group:

01

Copy To Group:

02

Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings

Press the key or to modify the value. Press the key ESC, and return to the
menu Settings. Press the ENT, the LCD will display the interface for password input,
if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key ESC to exit the
password input interface and return to the menu Settings. If the password is correct,
the LCD will display Copy Settings Success!, and exit this menu (returning to the menu
Settings).

8.4.7 Print Device Records


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Print menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-29
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

Selecting the Disturb Records, and then


Press the or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key ENT,
the LCD will display Start Printing... , and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu Print). If the printer doesnt complete its current print task
and re-start it for printing, the LCD will display Printer Busy. Press the key ESC
to exit this menu (returning to the menu Print).

Selecting the command menu Superv Events or IO Events, and then press the
key or to move the cursor. Press the or to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key ENT, the LCD will
display Start Printing, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the
menu Print). Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Print).

4.

If selecting the command menu IEC103 Info, Device Status or Device Info, press
the key ENT, the LCD will display Start printing.., and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu Print).

5.

If selecting the Settings, press ENT or to enter the submenu.

6.

After entering the submenu Settings, press the key or to move the cursor, and
then press the key ENT to print the corresponding default value. To select items to print:
Press the key or to select the setting group to print. After pressing the key ENT,
the LCD will display Start Printing, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu Settings). Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu
Settings).

7.

After entering the submenu Waveforms, press the or to select the printed
waveform and press ENT to enter. With waveform data existing:
Press the key or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key ENT,
the LCD will display Start Printing, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu Waveforms). If the printer does not complete its current print task and
re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display Printer Busy. Press the key ESC to
exit this menu (returning to the menu Waveforms). If there is no any waveform data,
the LCD will display No Waveform Data!.

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group


The operation is as follows:
1.

Exit the main menu.

2.

Press the GRP.

8-30

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

Change Active Group

Active Group:

01

Change To Group:

02

Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group

Press the or to modify the value, and then press the key ESC to exit this menu
(returning to the main menu). After pressing the key ENT, the LCD will display the password
input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key ESC to
exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the
HEALTHY indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check
the protection setting. If the check doesnt pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check
is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.

8.4.9 Delete Records


The operation is as follows:
1.

Exit the main menu.

2.

Press the , , , and key ENT; Press the key ESC to exit this menu
(returning to the original state). Press the key ENT to carry out the deletion.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-31
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

Press <ENT> To Clear


Press <ESC> To Exit

Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report

Note!
The operation of deleting report will delete all messages except for user operation reports
(i.e. control reports), including tripping reports, alarm reports and binary input change
reports. The deleted reports are irrecoverable, so the function shall be used with great
cautious.

8.4.10 Modify Device Clock


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Clock menu, and then press the key
ENT to enter clock display.

8-32

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

Clock
Year:

2010

Month:

04

Day:

28

Hour:

20

Minute:

59

Second:

14

Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.

4.

Press the key or , to modify value, and then press the key ENT to save the
modification and return to the main menu.

5.

Press the key ESC to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

8.4.11 View Module Information


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Information menu, and then press
the key ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Board Info, and
then press the ENT to enter the menu.

4.

Press the key or to move the scroll bar.

5.

Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Information menu).

8.4.12 Check Software Version


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Information menu, and then press
the key ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Version Info, and
then press the ENT to enter the menu.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-33
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

4.

Press the key or to move the scroll bar.

5.

Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Information menu).

8.4.13 Communication Test


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Test menu, and then press the key
ENT or to enter the menu.

3.

Select the command menu Prot Elements, Superv Events or IO Events, users
need to enter the submenu Device Test firstly.

4.

Select any command menu (takes Prot Elements as an example), press the key ENT,
two options All Test and Select Test are provided.

5.

If Select Test is selected, press the key ENT. Press the or to page up/down,
and then press the key or to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key ENT to execute the communication
test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the
corresponding fault report, and view the fault report produced by communication test in
the command menu Disturb Record Items.

6.

If All Test is selected, press the key ENT to execute the communication test of all
protection element one by one, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive all the
fault report.

Note!

If selecting the Superv Events or IO Events, the substation automatic system can
receive the corresponding self-check report or binary signals, and the self-check report or
binary signals produced by communication test can also be viewed by the two command
menus of Superv Events and IO Events in the menu Records.

8.4.14 Select Language


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Language menu, then press ENT
to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.

8-34

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

Please Select Language:


1

English

Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the preferred language and press the key
ENT to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will
return to the main menu, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press ESC to
cancel language switching and return to the main menu.
Note!
The LCD interfaces provided in this chapter are only for references and available for
explaining specific definition of LCD. The actual displayed interfaces maybe different from
these.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

8-35
Date: 2012-08-30

8 Human Machine Interface

8-36

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

9 Communications

9 Communications
Table of Contents
9 Communications ............................................................................ 9-a
9.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 Rear Communication Port Information ......................................................... 9-1
9.2.1 RS-485 Interface.................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2.2 Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication ........................................................................................ 9-4

9.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port .................................................... 9-4


9.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.2 Initialization .......................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.3 Time Synchronization .......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.4 Spontaneous Events ............................................................................................................ 9-5
9.3.5 General Interrogation ........................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.6 General Functions ............................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.7 Disturbance Records ........................................................................................................... 9-6

9.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet ........................................................ 9-6


9.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .............................................. 9-6
9.5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.5.2 Communication Profiles....................................................................................................... 9-7
9.5.3 Server Data Organization .................................................................................................... 9-8
9.5.4 Server Features and Configuration ................................................................................... 9-10
9.5.5 ACSI conformance ..............................................................................................................9-11
9.5.6 Logical Nodes .................................................................................................................... 9-15

9.6 DNP3.0 Interface ........................................................................................... 9-18


9.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 9-18
9.6.2 Link Layer Functions ......................................................................................................... 9-19

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-a
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

9.6.3 Transport Functions ........................................................................................................... 9-19


9.6.4 Application Layer Functions............................................................................................... 9-19

List of Figures
Figure 9.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ......................................................... 9-2
Figure 9.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ............................................................................ 9-3
Figure 9.2-3 Ethernet communication structure ...................................................................... 9-4

9-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

9.1 General Description


This section introduces NRs remote communications interfaces. The protective device is
compaitible with three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet). The
protocol provided by the protective device is indicated in the submenu in the Communication
Settings column. Using the keypad and LCD to set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and
[Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding protocol will be selected.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection no matter
whichever protocol is selected. It has advantage that 32 protective devices can be daisy chained
together in electrical connection using a twisted pair.
It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol
itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This
section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

9.2 Rear Communication Port Information


9.2.1 RS-485 Interface
This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. Each port has a
ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data
communication and are intended for permanently wired connection to a remote control center.
9.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the products connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, but
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
9.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120 (Ohm) Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 9.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-1
Date: 2013-06-03

Master

EIA RS-485

9 Communications

120 Ohm

120 Ohm

Slave

Slave

Slave

Figure 9.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

9.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies


The EIA RS-485 requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e. the
communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus
topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length
must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,
normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially
when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to
the products chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
9.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tbus. This can occur when all the slaves
are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The
reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,
until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in
the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,
causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response
times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a
complete failure to communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.
There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection
point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please
note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external
components will not be required.
Note!

9-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

It is extremely important that the 120 termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so
will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the
bus.

As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as
a result of incorrect application of this voltage.

Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

9.2.2 Ethernet Interface


This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu
Communication Settings.
9.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.

Figure 9.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

9.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies


Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been
connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-3
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

SCADA

Exchanger A

Exchanger B

Equipment

Equipment

Equipment

Figure 9.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

9.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication


The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is
using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an
Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to
respond commands received from master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective
device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu
Communication Settings, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and
[Baud_RS485]. To use the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and
the submask of each Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the
corresponding section in Chapter Settings for further details.

9.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port


The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the
protective device is the slave device.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

Initialization (reset)

Time synchronization

Event record extraction

General interrogation

General commands

9-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

Disturbance records

9.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer


Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.

9.3.2 Initialization
When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset
command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either
of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear
any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.

9.3.3 Time Synchronization


The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be
corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm
message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the
time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not
be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the
interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B
synchronized internal clock.

9.3.4 Spontaneous Events


Events are categorized by the following information:

Type identification (TYP)

Function type (FUN)

Information number (INF)

Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103


protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary Input and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause of
transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the
submenu IEC103 Info in the menu Print.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-5
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

9.3.5 General Interrogation


The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and the information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined
in the IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.

9.3.6 General Functions


The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the relay,
and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more
details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu IEC103
Info in the menu Print.

9.3.7 Disturbance Records


This protective device can store up to 64 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault
detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
It can be printed by the submenu IEC103 Info in the menu Print

9.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet


The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. All the functions provided by this relay are based on generic functions of the
IEC60870-5-103. This relay will send all the relevant information on group caption to SAS or RTU
after establishing a successful communication link.

9.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol


9.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC 61850-2: Glossary

IEC 61850-3: General requirements

IEC 61850-4: System and project management

9-6

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations


related to IEDs

IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles
and models

IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)

IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device Common
data classes

IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device Compatible
logical node classes and data classes

IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link

IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

9.5.2 Communication Profiles


PCS-915 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication protocol
stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires an IP address to establish communications.
1.

MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. Actual IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2.

Client/server

This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation device such as
protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.
3.

Peer-to-peer

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-7
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

This is a non-connection-oriented high speed communication between substation device, such as


protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication.
4.

Substation configuration language (SCL)

A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IEC
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.

9.5.3 Server Data Organization


IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. Each IED represents one
IEC61850 physical device. An IEC61850 physical device can contain one or more logical device(s)
(for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD contains
information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information about the
IED logical device. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is
composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level
for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
9.5.3.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is used to provide access to digital status points (including general I/O
inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be
configured before using. GGIO provides digital status points for access by clients. It is intended for
the use of GGIO by client to access to digital status values from PCS-915 series relays. Clients
can utilize the IEC61850 buffered report from GGIO to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and
HMI display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering
capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are
transmitted to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control
block (BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
9.5.3.2 Analog Values
Most of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else is in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Data of each MMXU logical node is
provided from a IED current/voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable
source. Data of MMXU1 is provided from CT/VT source 1 (usually for protection purpose), and
data of MMXU2 is provided from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All
these analog data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and
the corresponding unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical
nodes provide the following data for each source:

MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency

9-8

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

9.5.3.3 Protection Logical Nodes


The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-915 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.

PDIF: current differential and transfer trip

RBRF:Breaker failure

PTOC: Time overcurrent

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags PTRC.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PDIF1 is PDIF1.ST.Op.general. For PCS-915
series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for the
corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is reported
via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.
9.5.3.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defined for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked until Loc is changed to false. In PCS-915 series relays, besides the logical nodes
described above, there are some other logical nodes in the IEDs:
LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-9
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it is used to connect the operate outputs of one or more
protection functions to a common trip to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or alternatively, any
combination of operate outputs of protection functions may be combined to a new operate of
PTRC.

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to
the IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System (IEC
60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and is independent of the trigger
mode.

9.5.4 Server Features and Configuration


9.5.4.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be
configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes),
binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and
MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via
an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.

TrgOps: Trigger options.

The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:


Bit 1: Data-change
Bit 4: Integrity
Bit 5: General interrogation

OptFlds: Option Fields.

The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:


Bit 1: Sequence-number
Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
Bit 4: Data-set-name
Bit 5: Data-reference
Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
Bit 8: Conf-revision
Bit 9: Segmentation

IntgPd: Integrity period.

BufTm: Buffer time.

9-10

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

9.5.4.2 File Transfer


MMS file services allows transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from a PCS-915
series relay.
9.5.4.3 Timestamps
The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last
change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
9.5.4.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:

A five or six-character name prefix.

A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).

A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are in the form of xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is
configurable. Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and
7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation
project.

9.5.5 ACSI conformance


9.5.5.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services

Client

Server

PCS-915

B11

Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)

C1

B12

Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)

C1

Client-Server Roles

SCSMS Supported
B21

SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used

B22

SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used

B23

SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used

B24

SCSM: other

Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)


B31

Publisher side

B32

Subscriber side

Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)


B41

Publisher side

B42

Subscriber side

Where:
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-11
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y:

Supported by PCS-915 relay

N: Currently not supported by PCS-915 relay


9.5.5.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Services

Client

Server

PCS-915

M1

Logical device

C2

C2

M2

Logical node

C3

C3

M3

Data

C4

C4

M4

Data set

C5

C5

M5

Substitution

M6

Setting group control

Buffered report control

M7-1

sequence-number

M7-2

report-time-stamp

M7-3

reason-for-inclusion

M7-4

data-set-name

M7-5

data-reference

M7-6

buffer-overflow

M7-7

entryID

M7-8

BufTm

M7-9

IntgPd

M7-10

GI

Unbuffered report control

M8-1

sequence-number

M8-2

report-time-stamp

M8-3

reason-for-inclusion

M8-4

data-set-name

M8-5

data-reference

M8-6

BufTm

M8-7

IntgPd

Log control

Reporting
M7

M8

Logging
M9
9-12

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications
Services

Client

Server

PCS-915

M9-1

IntgPd

M10

Log

M12

GOOSE

M13

GSSE

M14

Multicast SVC

M15

Unicast SVC

M16

Time

M17

File transfer

GSE

Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y:

Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays


9.5.5.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Service

Server/Publisher

PCS-900 Series

Server
S1

ServerDirectory

Application association
S2

Associate

S3

Abort

S4

Release

LogicalDeviceDirectory

S6

LogicalNodeDirectory

S7

GetAllDataValues

GetDataValues

Logical device
S5
Logical node

Data
S8

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-13
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications
Service

Server/Publisher

PCS-900 Series

S9

SetDataValues

S10

GetDataDirectory

S11

GetDataDefinition

S12

GetDataSetValues

S13

SetDataSetValues

S14

CreateDataSet

S15

DeleteDataSet

S16

GetDataSetDirectory

SetDataValues

Data set

Substitution
S17

Setting group control


S18

SelectActiveSG

M/O

S19

SelectEditSG

M/O

S20

SetSGValuess

M/O

S21

ConfirmEditSGValues

M/O

S22

GetSGValues

M/O

S23

GetSGCBValues

M/O

Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24

Report

S24-1

data-change

S24-2

qchg-change

S24-3

data-update

S25

GetBRCBValues

S26

SetBRCBValues

Unbuffered report control block


S27

Report

S27-1

data-change

S27-2

qchg-change

S27-3

data-update

S28

GetURCBValues

S29

SetURCBValues

Logging
Log control block

9-14

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications
Service

Server/Publisher

PCS-900 Series

S30

GetLCBValues

S31

SetLCBValues

S32

QueryLogByTime

S33

QueryLogAfter

S34

GetLogStatusValues

Log

Generic substation event model (GSE)


GOOSE control block
S35

SendGOOSEMessage

S36

GetGoReference

S37

GetGOOSEElementNumber

S38

GetGoCBValues

S39

SetGoCBValuess

S51

Select

S52

SelectWithValue

S53

Cancel

S54

Operate

S55

Command-Termination

S56

TimeActivated-Operate

Control

File transfer
S57

GetFile

M/O

S58

SetFile

S59

DeleteFile

S60

GetFileAttributeValues

M/O

Time
SNTP

9.5.6 Logical Nodes


9.5.6.1 Logical Nodes Table
PCS-915 relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the
actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes

PCS-915

L: System Logical Nodes


LPHD: Physical device information

YES

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-15
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications
Nodes

PCS-915

LLN0: Logical node zero

YES

P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions


PDIF: Differential

YES

PDIR: Direction comparison

PDIS: Distance

PDOP: Directional overpower

PDUP: Directional underpower

PFRC: Rate of change of frequency

PHAR: Harmonic restraint

PHIZ: Ground detector

PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent

PMRI: Motor restart inhibition

PMSS: Motor starting time supervision

POPF: Over power factor

PPAM: Phase angle measuring

PSCH: Protection scheme

PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault

PTEF: Transient earth fault

PTOC: Time overcurrent

YES

PTOF: Overfrequency

PTOV: Overvoltage

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning

YES

PTTR: Thermal overload

PTUC: Undercurrent

PTUV: Undervoltage

PUPF: Underpower factor

PTUF: Underfrequency

PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent

PVPH: Volts per Hz

PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed

R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions


RDRE: Disturbance recorder function

YES

RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue

RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary

RDRS: Disturbance record handling

9-16

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications
Nodes

PCS-915

RBRF: Breaker failure

YES

RDIR: Directional element

RFLO: Fault locator

RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking

RREC: Autoreclosing

RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing

C: Logical Nodes For Control


CALH: Alarm handling

CCGR: Cooling group control

CILO: Interlocking

CPOW: Point-on-wave switching

CSWI: Switch controller

G: Logical Nodes For Generic References

GAPC: Generic automatic process control


GGIO: Generic process I/O

YES

GSAL: Generic security application


I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving

IHMI: Human machine interface

ITCI: Telecontrol interface

ITMI: Telemonitoring interface

A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control


ANCR: Neutral current regulator

ARCO: Reactive power control

ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller

AVCO: Voltage control

M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement


MDIF: Differential measurements

YES

MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics

MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic

MMTR: Metering

MMXN: Non phase related measurement

MMXU: Measurement

YES

MSQI: Sequence and imbalance

MSTA: Metering statistics

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-17
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications
Nodes

PCS-915

S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring


SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs

SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)

SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)

SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges

X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear


TCTR: Current transformer

YES

TVTR: Voltage transformer

YES

Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers


YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)

YLTC: Tap changer

YPSH: Power shunt

YPTR: Power transformer

Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment


ZAXN: Auxiliary network

ZBAT: Battery

ZBSH: Bushing

ZCAB: Power cable

ZCAP: Capacitor bank

ZCON: Converter

ZGEN: Generator

ZGIL: Gas insulated line

ZLIN: Power overhead line

ZMOT: Motor

ZREA: Reactor

ZRRC: Rotating reactive component

ZSAR: Surge arrestor

ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter

ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component

9.6 DNP3.0 Interface


9.6.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0

9-18

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the EIA RS-485 at the rear of this relay.
The data format is 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity bit and 1 stop bit.

9.6.2 Link Layer Functions


Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.

9.6.3 Transport Functions


Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.

9.6.4 Application Layer Functions


9.6.4.1 Time Synchronization
1.

2.

3.

Time delay measurement


Master/Slave

Function Code

Object

Variation

Qualifier

Master

0x17

Slave

0x81

0x34

0x02

0x07

Master/Slave

Function Code

Object

Variation

Qualifier

Master

0x01

0x34

0x00, 0x01

0x04-

Slave

0x81

0x34

0x02

0x07

Read time of device

Write time of device


Master/Slave

Function Code

Object

Variation

Qualifier

Master

0x02

0x32

0x01

0x00, 0x01, 0x07, 0x08

Slave

0x81

9.6.4.2 Supported Writing Functions


1.

Write time of device


See Section 9.6.4.1 for the details.

2.

Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)


Master/Slave

Function Code

Object

Variation

Qualifier

Master

0x02

0x50

0x01

0x00, 0x01

Slave

0x81

9.6.4.3 Supported Reading Functions


1.

Supported qualifiers
Master Variation

0x00

0x01

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

0x06

0x07

0x08

9-19
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications
Slave Variation

2.

0x00

0x01

0x01

0x07

0x08

Supported objects and variations

Object 1, Binary inputs


Master Variation

0x00

0x01

0x02

Slave Variation

0x02

0x01

0x02

The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are
transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.

Object 2, SOE
Master Qualifier

0x00

0x01

0x02

0x03

Slave Qualifier

0x00

0x01

0x02

0x03

If the master qualifier is 0x07, the slave responsive qualifier is 0x27; and if the master
qualifier is 0x01, 0x06 or 0x08, the slave responsive qualifier is 0x28.

Object 30, Analog inputs


Master Qualifier

0x00

0x01

0x02

0x03

0x04

Slave Qualifier

0x01

0x01

0x02

0x03

0x04

The metering values are transported firstly, and then the protection measurement values are
transported.

Object 40, Analog outputs


Master Variation

0x00

0x01

0x02

Slave Variation

0x01

0x01

0x02

The protection settings are transported in this object.

Object 50, Time Synchronization


See Section 9.6.4.1 for the details.

3.

Class 0 data request


The master adopts the Object 60 for the Class 0 data request and the variation is 0x01.
The slave responds with the above mentioned Object 1, Object 30 and Object 40 (see
Supported objects and variations in Section 9.6.4.3).

4.

Class 1 data request


The master adopts the Object 60 for the Class 1 data request and the variation is 0x02.
The slave responds with the above mentioned Object 2 (see Supported objects and
variations in Section 9.6.4.3).

5.

Multiple object request

9-20

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

The master adopts the Object 60 for the multiple object request and the variation is 0x01,
0x02, 0x03 and 0x04.
The slave responds with the above mentioned Object 1, Object 2, Object 30 and Object
40 (see Supported objects and variations in Section 9.6.4.3).
9.6.4.4 Remote Control Functions
The function code 0x03 and 0x04 are supported in this relay. The function code 0x03 is for the
remote control with selection; and the function code 0x04 is for the remote control with execution.
The selection operation must be executed before the execution operation, and the single point
control object can be supported to this relay.
Master Qualifier

0x17

0x27

0x18

0x28

Slave Qualifier

0x17

0x27

0x18

0x28

The Object 12 is for the remote control functions.


Master Variation

0x01

Slave Variation

0x01

Control Code

0x01: closing
0x10: tripping

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

9-21
Date: 2013-06-03

9 Communications

9-22

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03

11 Commissioning

11 Commissioning
Table of Contents
11 Commissioning ........................................................................... 11-a
11.1 General .......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Commission Tools ....................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................. 11-2
11.5 Product Checks ............................................................................................ 11-3
11.5.1 With the Relay De-energized ............................................................................................11-3
11.5.2 With the Relay Energized .................................................................................................11-5
11.5.3 Protection Function Checks ..............................................................................................11-7
11.5.4 Print Fault Report ............................................................................................................11-21
11.5.5 On-load Checks ..............................................................................................................11-21
11.5.6 Final Checks ...................................................................................................................11-22

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-a
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

11-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

11.1 General
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipments rating label.

11.2 Safety Instructions


WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING! Only the qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after
becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well
as with the applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:

The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.

Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.

Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)

The limit values stated in the Chapter Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.

When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-1
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING! Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar
with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).

11.3 Commission Tools


Minimum equipment required:

Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.

Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V
respectively.

Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).

Phase angle meter.

Phase rotation meter.


NOTE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.

Optional equipment:

An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).

A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).

EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).

PCS-915 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-2000.

11.4 Setting Familiarization


When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter Operation Theory and Chapter Settings.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.

11-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as


PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
familiar with its operation.

11.5 Product Checks


These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.

11.5.1 With the Relay De-energized


This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to users correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.

Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces test

Binary input circuits and output circuits test

AC input circuits test

Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.

Measuring elements test

Timers test

Metering and recording test

Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-3
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

external equipment.

On load test.

Phase sequence check and polarity check.

11.5.1.1 Visual Inspection


After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.

Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.

Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.

Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.

Equipment plug-in modules


Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.

Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button


Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.

11.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)


Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:

11-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

Voltage transformer circuits

Current transformer circuits

DC power supply

Optic-isolated control inputs

Output contacts

Communication ports

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V.


Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
11.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customers normal practice.
11.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relays nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter Technical Data,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter Technical Data. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING! Energize this relay only if the power supply is within the specified operating
ranges in Chapter Technical Data.

11.5.2 With the Relay Energized


The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-5
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

11.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display


Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.
11.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item Clock.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
11.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED HEALTHY should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip when the relay was last
energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the
auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that LED because it is known to be operational.
11.5.2.4 Testing the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the HEALTHY LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the HEALTHY LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter Supervision, the MISC_ALM LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the MISC_ALM LED extinguishes.
11.5.2.5 Testing the TRIP LED
The xx_TRIP LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay.
However the xx_TRIP LED will operate during the setting checks. Therefore no further testing of
the TRIP LED is required at this stage.
11.5.2.6 Testing the AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance

11-6

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
11.5.2.7 Testing the AC Voltage Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
11.5.2.8 Testing the Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign 1 denotes an energized
input and sign 0 denotes a de-energized input.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.

11.5.3 Protection Function Checks


11.5.3.1 Busbar differential protection
Read default settings via PCSPC and download default settings to the protective device. Then
make changes on the base of the default setting.
System Settings and BBP Settings can be configured temporarily as following for easier test.
(Just for reference)
Setting System Settings

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-7
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

[U2n]=110V
[I2n_CT_Base]=1A
[I1n_Bayxx]=1200 (xx=01~25)
Setting BBP Settings
[I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP] =1.8A
[En_BBP]=1
Change the following settings to avoid effects on steady state differential protection element.
[I_BFP_BC]=5A
[I_Alm_CTS]=5A
[I_Alm_SensCTS]=5A
Setting VEBI Settings:
[VEBI_BBP]=1
Energize the binary input [EBI_BBP]
Please pay attention that the polarity of CT of bus coupler is same to CT of feeder connected to
bus 1, but opposite to that connected to bus 2.
External fault test
1.

Set bay 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay02] and
set bay 03 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay03].

2.

Connect CT of bay 02 and BC CT with the reverse polarity in series and then connect CT of
bay 03 with reverse polarity in series (Refer to Figure 11.5-1). Inject a current (For example
ITEST1 100 ) to make steady-state percentage differential element operate.

3.

VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage differential element does not operate.

11-8

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

ITEST1
A

1601

Test source

1603
BUS COUPLER

1605
1602
1604
1606

1607
1609

1612

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1610

PCS-915

1608

Bay 02

1611

1613
1615
1617
Bay03

1614
1616
1618

Figure 11.5-1 External fault test

Because check zone differential current is equal to zero, the protective judges that it is an external
fault.
Internal fault test (BB1)
1.

Set bay 02 connecting to BB1 though energizing binary input [BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay02] and
set bay 03 connecting to BB2 though energizing binary input [BI_52a_DSBB2_Bay03]

2.

Connect CT of bay 02, BC CT, and CT of bay 03 with the same polarity in series (Refer to
Figure 11.5-2).

3.

Only inject a current to make steady-state percentage differential element operate (For
example ITEST1 10 0 A).

4.

VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage differential element operates with
BBP_TRIP LED and MISC_TRIP LED turned on simultaneously.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-9
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

ITEST1

1601

Test source

1603

BUS COUPLER

1605
1602
1604
1606

1607

1610

PCS-915

1608

Bay 02

1611

1612

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1609

1613
1615

Bay 03

1617
1614
1616
1618

Figure 11.5-2 Internal fault test (BB1)

Internal fault test (BB2)


Test method is similar with BB1
Single busbar mode test
Energize the binary input [EBI_IntLink_Mode]
Repeat internal fault test mentioned above. Steady-state percentage differential element will
operate and trip all feeders connected with BBP_TRIP LED and MISC_TRIP LED turned on
simultaneously. After the test is finished, denergize the binary input [EBI_IntLink_Mode].

Check the setting [I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP]=1.8A

1.

Set both bay 02 and bay 03 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input
[BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay02] and [BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay03].

2.

Connect CT of bay 02 and CT of bay 03 with the same polarity in series (Refer to Figure
11.5-3)

3.

Inject a current (For example ITEST1 [I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP] 1.05/2 0.94500 A), the
steady-state percentage differential element will operate to trip BB1

11-10

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

4.

Inject a current ( ITEST1 [I_Pkp_Pcnt_BBP] 0.95/2 0.85500 A), the steady state
percentage differential element will not operate.

ITEST1

1607

Test Source

1609
1611
Bay 02

1608
1610

PCS-915

1613
1615

Bay 03

1617

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1612

1614
1616
1618

Binary input
[BI_Blk_BBP]

PCS-915

0514
0517

Figure 11.5-3 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test

Check external binary input blocking BBP


Change BBP Settings
1.

Set both bay 02 and bay 03 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input
[BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay02] and [BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay03].

2.

Connect CT of bay 02 and CT of bay 03 with the same polarity in series and connect the
binary input [BI_Blk_BBP] (Refer to Figure 11.5-3).

3.

Energize the binary input [BI_Blk_BBP].

4.

Inject a current (For example ITEST1 10 0 A), BBP protection will not operate.

11.5.3.2 BC end zone fault protection


BC breaker is closed
1.

Set bay 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing the binary input [BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay02]
and set bay 03 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [BI_DSBB2_Bay03].

2.

Connect CT of bay 02 and BC CT the opposite polarity in series, and then connect CT of bay
03 with reverse polarity in series. Then connect binary output contact of tripping BB2 and

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-11
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

binary input [BI_52b_BC] to test source. Connect binary output contact of tripping BB1 and
binary output contact of tripping bay 03 to time meter. (Refer to Figure 11.5-4)
I TEST1

1601
1603
BUS COUPLER

1605
1602
1604
1606

1607

Bay 02

1608

Test source

PCS-915

1611

Current Circuit

1609

1610
1612

1613
1615
Bay 03

1617
1614
1616
1618
0514
0501

Binary output
tripping bay 03

1210
1205

Binary output
tripping bay 02

1206

Start
Time
meter

PCS-915

1209

Binary input
[BI_52b_BC ]

Stop

Figure 11.5-4 BC end zone fault protection test (BC breaker is closed)

3.

Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to simulate to trip BC
breaker and to make end zone fault protection operate. (For example STAGE 1:

ITEST1 10 0 A and binary input [BI_52b_BC] is de-energized; STAGE 2: ITEST1 10 0 A


and binary input [BI_52b_BC] is energized)
4.

Use binary output contact of tripping BB2 (bay 03 will be tripped) as a triggering signal to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2.

5.

Start test from STAGE 1. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB2. The binary output
contact of tripping BB2 (bay 03 will be tripped) will close and control the test source to change

11-12

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, and then BBP will trip BB1 with a time delay for end
zone fault protection operates to make BC current be excluded from discriminative zone
differential current. BBP_TRIP LED and MISC_TRIP LED will be turned on.
BC breaker is open
1.

Set bay 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay02].

2.

Energize binary input [BI_52b_BC].

3.

Connect CT of bay 02 and BC CT with the opposite polarity in series, and connect VTs of BB1
and BB2. (Refer to Figure 11.5-5)

ITEST1

1601
1603

BUS COUPLER

1605
1602
1604
1606

1609

1610

PCS-915

1608

Bay 02

1611

1612
V
2807
2809
2811

BUS 1 VOLTAGE

UTEST1

CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

1607
Test source

2808

2815
2817

BUS 2 VOLTAGE

2813

2814

Figure 11.5-5 BC end zone fault protection test (BC breaker is open)

4.

Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to make end zone
fault protection operate. (For example STAGE 1: ITEST1 000 A , UTEST1 4000 V ;
STAGE 2: ITEST1 200 A , UTEST1 000 V ).

5.

Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BBP should operate to only trip BC breaker and BB1

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-13
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

with BBP_TRIP LED and MISC_TRIP LED turned on.


11.5.3.3 Bus coupler SOTF protection
Setting BBP_Settings:
[I_OC_SOTF_BC]=1A
[En_SOTF_BC]=1
Setting VEBI_Settings:
[VEBI_SOTF_BC]=1
Check BC SOTF protection
Energize the binary input [EBI_SOTF_BC].
1.

Connect the BC CT, connect VT of BB1 and connect binary input [BI_52b_BC]. (Refer to
Figure 11.5-6)

ITEST1
A

1601
1603

1602
1604

PCS-915

1606

1607
Test source
1609

CURRENT CIRCUIT

BUS COUPLER

1605

Bay 02

1611
1608
1610
1612

0501

Binary input
[BI_52b_BC]

PCS-915

0514

Figure 11.5-6 BC SOTF protection test

2.

Injecting a current ITEST1 0.950 0 A and make the binary input [BI_52b_BC] change from
being energized to being de-energized, BC SOTF protection should not operate.

3.

Injecting a current ITEST1 1.050 0 A and make the binary input [BI_52b_BC] change from
being energized to being de-energized, BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC
breaker with MISC_TRIP LED turned on.

11-14

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

Must inject the current while the binary input [BI_52b_BC] changes from being energized to being
de-energized, because the BC SOTF protection is only enabled for 300ms when the binary input
[BI_52b_BC] changes from being energized to being de-energized.
11.5.3.4 Bus coupler overcurrent protection
Change BBP_Settings
[I_OC_BC] =1A
[I_ROC_BC] =1A
[t_OC_BC] =0.5S
[En_OC_BC]=1
Setting VEBI_Settings:
[VEBI_OC_BC]=1
Energize binary input [EBI_OC_BC].
Connect the BC CT and binary output contact of tripping BC to time meter. (For example Figure
11.5-7)
I1

Test source

1601

1604

BUS COUPLER

1602

PCS-915

1605

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1603

1606
Start
Time meter

PCS-915

1201 Bus couple protection


operates to trip BC
1202

Stop

Figure 11.5-7 BC OC protection test

Check the setting i.e. [I_OC_BC]=1A


Change BBP_Settings
[I_ROC_BC]=2A
1.

Inject a current ITEST1 0.950 0 A and BC OC protection should not operate.

2.

Inject a current ITEST1 1.050 0 A and BC OC protection should operate to trip BC breaker
with MISC_TRIP LED turned on.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-15
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

3.

After finishing the test, change the setting i.e. [I_ROC_BC] =1A

Check the setting i.e. [I_ROC_BC]=1A


Change BBP_Settings
[I_OC_BC]=2A
1.

Inject a current ITEST1 0.950 0 A and BC OC protection should not operate.

2.

Inject a current ITEST1 1.050 0 A and BC OC protection should operate to trip BC breaker
with MISC_TRIP LED turned on.

3.

After finishing the test, change the setting i.e. [I_OC_BC] =1A

11.5.3.5 Bus coupler breaker failure protection


Change BBP_Settings
[I_BFP_BC]=1A
[t_TrpBB_BFP_BC]=0.5S
Setting VEBI_Settings:
[VEBI_BFP]=1
Check BBP initiating BC BFP
Change BBP_Settings
[En_BBP]=1
Setting VEBI_Settings:
[VEBI_BBP]=1
Energize the function binary input [EBI_BBP]
1.

Simulating an internal fault on BB1.

2.

Inject a current ITEST1 20 0 A and the persisting time is longer than the setting i.e.
[t_TrpBB_BFP_BC].

3.

BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. BBP_TRIP LED and
MISC_TRIP LED will be turned on first. Then after a delay [t_TrpBB_BFP_BC], BC BFP will
operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and BFP_TRIP LED will be turned on.

4.

After finishing the test, change the setting i.e. [En_BBP]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[EBI_BBP].

Check external binary input initiating BC BFP

11-16

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

1.

Connect BC CT and binary input [BI_BFI_BC] to test source (Refer to Figure 11.5-8)
I1

1601

1604

Test source

PCS-915

1602

BUS COUPLER

1605

CURRENT CIRCUIT

1603

1606

0925

Binary input
[BI_BFI_BC]

PCS-915

0914

Figure 11.5-8 BC BFP test

2.

Please set two stages to make the BC BFP operate. (For example STAGE 1:

ITEST1 00 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_BC] is energized; STAGE 2: ITEST1 20 0 A and


binary input [BI_BFI_BC] is energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as
1s.
3.

Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2 with a time
delay [t_TrpBB_BFP_BC]. BFP_TRIP LED and MISC_TRIP LED should be turned on.

11.5.3.6 Bus coupler pole discrepancy protection


[I_ROC_PD_BC]=1A
[I_NegOC_PD_BC]=1A
[t_PD_BC]=1S
[En_PD_BC]=1
Setting VEBI_Settings:
[VEBI_PD_BC]=1
Energize the binary inputs [EBI_PD_BC] and [BI_52b_BC].
Check settings [I_ROC_PD_BC]=1A
Change BBP_Settings
[I_NegOC_PD_BC]=5A
1.

Connect BC CT to test source. Connect binary output contact of BC protection operating to a


time meter.(Refer to Figure 11.5-9)

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-17
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning
ITEST1
A

1601
1603

BUS COUPLER

1602

PCS-915

1605

1604

CURRENT CIRCUIT

Test source

1606
Start
Time meter
1202

Bus coupler
protection operate
to trip BC

PCS-915

1201

Stop

Figure 11.5-9 BC pole discrepancy protection test

2.

Inject a current ITEST1 0.950 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[t_PD_BC]. BC PD protection does not operate.

3.

Inject a current ITEST1 1.050 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[t_PD_BC].

4.

BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker with a time delay [t_PD_BC], and
MISC_TRIP LED should be turned on.

5.

After finishing the test, please change the setting i.e. [I_NegOC_PD_BC]=1A.

Check the setting i.e. [I_NegOC_PD_BC]=1A


Change BBP_Settings
[I_ROC_PD_BC]=5A
1.

Connect BC CT. (Refer to Figure 11.5-9)

2.

Inject a current ITEST1 2.850 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[t_PD_BC]. BC PD protection does not operate.

3.

Inject a current ITEST1 3.150 0 A and persisting time is longer than the time delay
[t_PD_BC].

4.

BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker with a time delay [t_PD_BC], and
MISC_TRIP LED should be turned on.

5.

After finishing the test, please change the setting i.e. [I_ROC_PD_BC]=1A.

6.

After finishing all test of BC PD protection, de-energize the two binary inputs [EBI_PD_BC]

11-18

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

and [BI_52b_BC].
11.5.3.7 Feeder breaker failure protection
Chang BFP Settings
[t_TrpBC_BFP]=0.25S
[t_TrpBB_BFP]=0.35S
[V_UV_VCE_BFP]=30V
[V_ROV_VCE_BFP]=8V
[V_NegOV_VCE_BFP]=3V
[I_OC_BFP_Bay02]=2A
[I_ROC_BFP_Bay02]=1A
[I_NegOC_BFP_Bay02]=1A
[En_ROC_BFP_Bay02]=0
[En_NegOC_BFP_Bay02]=0
[En_BFP]=1
[VEBI_BFP]=1
Energize the binary input [EBI_BFP]
Set bay 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [BI_52a_DSBB1_Bay02].
Connect the VT of BB1, CT of bay 02 and binary inputs [BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans] and
[BI_BFI_Bay02] to test source (Refer to Figure 11.5-10).

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-19
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

UTEST1
UTEST2

V
2807
2809
2811
2808
2810
2812

1607
1609

Test source

PCS-915

ITEST1

CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

BUS 1 voltage

UTEST3

Bay 02

1611
1608
1610
1612

0518
0614
0601

Binary input
[BI_Rls_VCE_
BFP_Trans]
Binary input
[BI_BFI_Bay02]

PCS-915

0514

Figure 11.5-10 BFP test

Check BFP
1.

Set two stages: STAGE 1:

ITEST1 00 0 A

and binary input [BI_BFI_Bay02] is

de-energized; STAGE 2: ITEST1 2.50 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Bay02] is energized.


2.

The persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.

3.

Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP should operate to re-trip bay 02, and then trip BC
breaker and finally trip BB1 with different time delays. BFP_TRIP LED and MISC_TRIP
should be turned on.

Check VCE of BFP


1.

De-energize the binary input [BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans].

2.

Set

three

stages:

STAGE1:

UTEST1 63.50 0 V

UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V

UTEST3 63.5120 0 V , ITEST1 00 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Bay02] is de-energized;


STAGE2: UTEST1 63.50 0 V , UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V , UTEST3 63.5120 0 V ,

ITESY1 2.50 0 A

and

STAGE3: UTEST1 00 0 V ,

binary

input

[BI_BFI_Bay02]

UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V ,

11-20

is

energized;

UTEST3 63.5120 0 V ,
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

ITEST1 2.50 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Bay02] is energized.


3.

The persisting time of STAGE 1, STAGE 2 and STAGE 3 are set as 1s.

4.

Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP should not operate. Sequentially test from STAGE
2 to STAGE 3. BFP should operate.

Check external binary input [BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans] releasing the voltage blocking


element
1.

Set

two

stages:

STAGE1:

UTEST1 63.50 0 V

UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V

UTEST3 63.5120 0 V , ITEST1 00 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Bay02] is de-energized;


STAGE2: UTEST1 63.50 0 V , UTEST2 63.5 120 0 V , UTEST3 63.5120 0 V ,

ITESY1 2.50 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Bay02] is energized.


2.

The persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.

3.

Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP should not operate.

4.

Energize the binary input [BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Trans] and repeat the above test, BFP will
operate.

11.5.4 Print Fault Report


In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips

11.5.5 On-load Checks


The objectives of the on-load checks are:

Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.

Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).

Check the polarity of each current transformer.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

11-21
Date: 2012-08-30

11 Commissioning

However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.

11.5.6 Final Checks


After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LEDs has been reset before leaving the protection.

11-22

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

12 Maintenance

12 Maintenance
Table of Contents
12 Maintenance ................................................................................ 12-a
12.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ......................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 12-1
12.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 12-3
12.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 12-3

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

12-a
Date: 2012-08-30

12 Maintenance

12-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

12 Maintenance

NR numerical relay PCS-915 is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and
signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output
relays are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.

12.1 Appearance Check


1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.

12.2 Failure Tracing And Repair


Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the Superv Events screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:

Test circuit connections are correct

Modules are securely inserted in position

Correct DC power voltage is applied

Correct AC inputs are applied

Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

12.3 Replace Failed Modules


If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
PCS-915A Busbar Protection

12-1
Date: 2012-08-30

12 Maintenance

recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.


Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, BI, BO, etc.)
and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the CPU module replaced should
have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have the
same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu Version Info.
Caution!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
1)

Replacing a module

Switch off the DC power supply

Disconnect the trip outputs

Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs

Unscrew the module.


Warning!
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

2)

Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)

Open the relay front panel

Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.

Detach the HMI module from the relay

Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

3)

Replacing the AI, PWR, CPU, BI or BO module

Unscrew the module connector

Unplug the connector from the target module.

Unscrew the module.

Pull out the module

12-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

12 Maintenance

Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.

After replacing the CPU module, input the application-specific setting values again.
Warning!
Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.
Warning!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
Danger!
After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the
replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.

12.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.

12.5 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40oC to +70oC, but the temperature of from 0oC
to +40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

12-3
Date: 2012-08-30

12 Maintenance

12-4

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

13 Decommissioning and Disposal


Table of Contents
13 Decommissioning and Disposal ................................................ 13-a
13.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 13-1

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

13-a
Date: 2012-08-30

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

13-b

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

13.1 Decommissioning
1.

Switching off

To switch off the PCS-915, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2.

Disconnecting Cables

Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
Danger!
Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the DC module of the
PCS-915, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is
switched off.
Danger!
Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is
switched off.
3.

Dismantling

The PCS-915 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
Danger!
When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.

13.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
Note!
Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

13-1
Date: 2012-08-30

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

13-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2012-08-30

14 Manual Version History

14 Manual Version History


In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version

Software

Date

Description of change

New

Version

R1.00

R1.00

2011-08-16

Form the original manual.

R1.00

R1.01

R1.00

2012-08-31

The original manual is changed to loose-leaf manual

R1.01

R1.02

R1.00

2013-06-03

Mechnical dimension of the device is changed

Source

PCS-915A Busbar Protection

14-1
Date: 2013-06-03

14 Manual Version History

14-2

PCS-915A Busbar Protection


Date: 2013-06-03